TW498692B - Methods and apparatus for transporting and positioning film in a digital film processing system - Google Patents

Methods and apparatus for transporting and positioning film in a digital film processing system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW498692B
TW498692B TW89128232A TW89128232A TW498692B TW 498692 B TW498692 B TW 498692B TW 89128232 A TW89128232 A TW 89128232A TW 89128232 A TW89128232 A TW 89128232A TW 498692 B TW498692 B TW 498692B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
film
tape
developing
belt
patent application
Prior art date
Application number
TW89128232A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Michael R Thering
Robert S Young Jr
G Gregory Mooty
Paul K Highley
Richard A Coleman
Original Assignee
Applied Science Fiction Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Applied Science Fiction Inc filed Critical Applied Science Fiction Inc
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TW498692B publication Critical patent/TW498692B/en

Links

Landscapes

  • Photographic Developing Apparatuses (AREA)

Abstract

A digital film processing system is provided. Each scanning module in the system has a removable mounting panel to which the scanning and transportation components are secured. An opening or door can be provided between the modules to compensate for film buckling. The film can be tensioned during scanning for control over its position. Tape can be attached to side edges of the film, and the tape can be moved through the system, avoiding contact with the film. Also, a belt transport system can be utilized to contact the film (or attached tape) only on the lateral edges. The film may be threaded through the system by using a leader attached to the lead edge of the film. To transport the film and leader, a transport mechanism having a roller connecting a pair of sprockets may be used, and a single drive unit may be provided to pull the film.

Description

498692 A7 _ B7 五、發明說明() 技術領域 本發明大體而言係關於軟片掃描,尤其係關於在數位 軟片掃描系統中用以運送、定位及掃描軟片之方法及設備 〇 發明背景 彩色攝影軟片通常係包含三層光感材料,其分別可以 感應紅、綠及藍色光。在習知的彩色攝影軟片的顯影過程 中,曝光的軟片係經過化學處理,以在三個層體中產生染 料’其顏色密度係正比於該相應於由攝影景物所反射之光 線而記錄在軟片上之藍、綠及紅色光譜的曝光時間。黃色 染料係形成在上層,紫紅色染料係形成在中間層,而藍綠 色染料則係形成在下層,所形成之染料的組合則係可顯示 出隱伏的影像。一旦該軟片經過顯影,一分開的印染程序 便可利用顯影的軟片及相紙而將攝影之影像記錄下來。 不同於傳統的軟片顯影,目前已發展出數位軟片顯影 技術,或者係數位軟片處理系統。在此類系統中係採用化 學顯影曝光軟片以形成由銀金屬顆粒或微粒在軟片之每一 紅、綠及藍色記錄層中構成景像。接著,在軟片顯影的同 時,其係利用電磁射線來加以掃描,其中該射線最好係具 有一特定之頻率,且最好係紅外線頻率範圍。詳言之,當 軟片相應於化學顯影劑而顯影時,一光源係照射至軟片之 正面,而另一光源則係照射至軟片之背面。在上層中顯影 之元素銀顆粒(例如,藍色感光層)係可以藉由正面光源 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) I ! I — 訂-----I I I I —在 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 4 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498692 A7 B7 五、發明說明(2 ) 所反射之光線而由軟片之正面看到;然而,這些顆粒基本 上係隱藏於軟片之背面。同樣地,在底層(例如,紅色感 光層)中顯影之元素銀顆粒係藉由該背面光源所反射之光 線而由軟片之背面看到;然而這些顆粒大致上係隱藏在正 面。同時,在中間層(例如,綠色感光層)中之元素銀顆 粒係被正面或背面射射之光線所隱藏;然而,這些顆粒係 可以由任何穿透該三個層體之光線而看到,如同在另兩層 體中之顆粒。由於針對每一圖素位置係需要感應由軟片正 面、背面反射出來之光線以及穿透該軟片之光線,因此針 對每一圖素便需要有三個測量値。針對每一圖素之三個測 量値便可以解決三種顏色,以使每一圖素具有三色碼値, 然後複數個具有顏色之圖素便可以沖印或顯示,而使人可 以觀看到影像。 若有需要,在軟片上之每一座標點之掃描係可以在軟 片顯影過程中進行相當多次。因此,在顯影期間可以快速 顯現之座標點圖樣係可加以記錄,且在軟片顯影之前該座 標點之圖樣係不會顯現出來。複數個數位影像檔案接著便 可以組合在一起而形成一單一加強的影像檔案。 爲了使相同之影像在數位軟片顯影期間可以進行多次 掃描,因此便需要採用多重掃描裝置,每一掃描裝置係在 該軟片之不同顯影期間來進行掃描。最好,此一多重掃描 系統係可以簡易地修改、升級及維修’以符合使用者之需 要。舉例來說,在一數位軟片顯影系統中係存在有一需求 ,亦即,其可以在最短的關機時間內,於系統中完成快速 (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) ------ 丨—訂---I--I--丨----- 498692 A7 B7 五、發明說明(3) 且簡易的元件增添、移除及/或更換。 在一數位軟片顯影系統中每一張軟片之運送,通常係 比習知的軟片運送系統還要來得麻煩。詳言之,該軟片應 必須可以順利地且有效率地來運送,以提供最佳化的影像 結果。由於使用在數位軟片顯影系統中之光學系統係具有 較窄的深度,因此對於小心地控制該軟片欲掃描之部分的 位置、方向及移動便相當地重要,亦即,當軟片欲加以掃 描時,精確地定位及維持該軟片在適當位置上係相當地重 要’並且避免碰觸或刮擦該軟片內含有隱伏影像之部位。 當軟片運送通過系統時產生卡住或扭曲時,便會造成系統 故障,因此這些情況亦需加以避免或解決。此外,最好該 運送系統係可使該軟片內含有隱伏影像之部分,在顯影期 間可以由一均勻的顯影劑層體加以完全地覆蓋,同時減少 該顯影劑與運送設備之間的傳輸。此外,該運輸系統最好 係可以處理各種不同類型及尺寸之軟片,而不會在掃描期 間遮蔽該軟片內含隱伏影像之任何部分。對於該軟片運送 系統亦存在有一需求,尤其當其採用多重掃描裝置時,亦 即,其可以不需要重複手動地將該軟片穿過各種不同的掃 描裝置。 發明摘要 本發明之至少一實施例的優點係在於’當軟片運送及 掃描時,該軟片之定位係受到精確的控制。 在本發明之至少一實施例中,其係提供一種易於升級 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) -------丨訂--------- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A7 ________B7____ 五、發明說明(4 ) 及維修之數位軟片處理系統。 本發明之至少一實施例的優點係在於,其係可以採用 一單一數位軟片顯影系統來處理各種不同尺寸之軟片。 (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 本發明之至少一實施例的優點係在於,在軟片側緣上 所具有之資訊係可以被掃描,並且由數位軟片處理系統所 應用。 本發明之至少一實施例的優點係在於,其係可以減少 手動地將軟片穿過一數位軟片顯影系統之操作。 本發明至少一實施例的另一優點係在於,不需要過多 之驅動裝置便可驅動軟片通過一數位軟片顯影系統。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 依照本發明之一特徵,其係提供一種數位軟片顯影系 統,其包含一第一軟片掃描模組,用以供應射線至軟片, 並且感應由軟片所反射之射線,以及一第二軟片掃描模組 ,其係用以供應射線至軟片,並且感應由軟片反射回來之 射線。一緩衝組件係可位在第一及第二掃描模組之間,且 該緩衝組件係可包括一開口,可使軟片通過該開口而移動 。每一模組之元件係可以安裝在一安裝構件上,且該安裝 構件係安裝於一外殼之骨架上。每一安裝構件係可以由骨 架上拆離’以將模組由系統中移除。 依照本發明之另一特徵,其係提供一種軟片之運送系 統’其係將曝光軟片移動通過一處理裝置,使得軟片其包 含隱伏景> 像之中央部分在處理過程中不會受到任何阻礙。 本發明之運送系統亦可以避免在軟片之中央部分與處理設 備之間的接觸,而使得處理過程中不會刮傷軟片之此一重 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 498692 A7 ____B7 五、發明說明(5 ) 要部分。本發明之運送系統係不會阻礙光線到達軟片之中 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 央部分之路徑,這對於數位軟片處理係特別地具有優點。 在處理設備與軟片之中央部分之間不會形成直接接觸,係 可進一步地避免施加於軟片中央部分之顯影劑之污染。本 發明之運送系統亦可提供彈性,以處理各種不同尺寸之軟 片。 當做爲數位軟片處理時之掃描裝置時,本發明之一特 徵係可提供軟片待掃描部分之位置與方向的精確控制性。 此一控制性係可避免軟片在顯影過程中有不當的移動,並 且可增進所形成之掃描影像的品質。 依照本發明之另一特徵,其係提供一種將軟片運送通 過一掃描系統之方法。該方法係包含將軟片帶連接至一膠 帶,並且僅與該膠帶銜接,以及使膠帶通過一掃描機構’ 以產生一數位影像檔。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 依照本發明之另一特徵,其係提供一種將軟片運送通 過一數位軟片顯影系統之方法。在此方法中,一前導帶之 末緣係連接至一軟片帶之前緣,且該前導帶係穿過一軟片 運送系統,該運送系統則係用以移動該前導帶及所連結之 軟片。一顯影劑係施加在軟片上,以使該軟片開始顯影。 供應射線至該顯影軟片,且感應由顯影軟片反射之射線。 依照本發明之另一特徵,其係針對運送軟片及一連結 之前導帶而提供一運送機構。該機構係包括一對相對之鏈 輪,該鏈輪係具有齒部而可與一軟片帶上之鏈輪孔相銜接 。該機構亦可包括一滾輪,其係連接該鏈輪,並且用以支 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498692 A7 B7 五、發明說明(6) 擦一前導帶。該前導帶最好係比軟片還窄,且可以由滾輪 來自行加以對正。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 依照本發明之另一特徵,其係提供一種數位軟片顯影 系統,該系統包含一顯影劑施配器,其係用以施加顯影劑 至軟片,一光源係用以供應射線至顯影軟片,以及一感應 器係用以偵測由該顯影軟片所反射之射線。一單一驅動機 構係用以移動該顯影軟片通過該光源及感應器。 習於此技者可以由以下之說明而瞭解到各個實施例之 其他優點,其中圖示及說明之示例性實施例僅係做爲闡述 本發明之目的。如以下將瞭解的,在不脫離本發明之範圍 下,本發明係具有各種不同的特徵及實施例。因此,在本 說明中所述之優點、圖式及說明內容,係做爲闡述之目的 而不具有任何限制之意涵。 圖式之簡單說明 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 雖然在申請專利範圍中已經特別指出本發明之特點, 然而一般相信,由以下之說明並配合所附之圖式,將可以 封本發明有更進一步的瞭解,在圖式中,相同之元件標號 係用以標不相同之兀件。 圖1係一數位軟片顯影系統之示例性實施例的立體視 圖’該系統係可以與本發明之方法及設備配合使用。 圖2係顯示圖1之數位軟片顯影系統之示例性操作方 式; 圖3係依照本發明之示例性模組化數位軟片顯影系統 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498692 A7 -------B7____ 五、發明說明(7 ) ’其係具有複數個掃描站或模組; 圖4係依照本發明所製成之模組化數位軟片顯影系統 之·^體視圖; 圖5係圖4之數位軟片顯影系統之側視圖; 圖6係依照本發明之示例性軟片緩衝組件之立體視圖 ’其中該緩衝組件係具有一活門板(圖中係顯示其位在關 閉位置),該組件係使用在一模組化數位軟片顯影系統之 掃描模組之間; 圖7係圖6之軟片緩衝組件之立體視圖,其中該活門 板係位在打開之位置; 圖8 a及8 b係顯示圖6之活門板在關閉位置與打開 位置之間轉動的情況; 圖9係依照本發明之一示例性弓形軟片運送及導組件 之立體視圖,其係使用在一數位軟片顯影系統中; 圖1 0係本發明之軟片運送及導引組件之另一實施例 的部分立體視圖,其係使用在數位軟片顯影系統中; 圖1 1係依照本發明所製成之軟片運送及緩衝系統之 另一實施例的側視圖; 圖1 2係依照本發明之軟片運送系統之另一實施例的 側視圖; 圖1 3係依照本發明之數位軟片顯影系統之槪要側視 圖; 圖1 3 A係一示意圖,其中顯示一依照本發明所設計 之示例性皮帶組件與待運送軟片帶相接觸之狀態; - •-----l·.— K ^-----------訂---------線 — U (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498692 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明(8) 圖1 3 B係一示意圖,其中顯示依照本發明之原理所 設計之一對運送皮帶捕捉一軟片帶之單側之另一實施例; 圖1 3 C係本發明另一實例,顯示一系統,可供經過 單一處理單元之軟片帶之多次通過。 圖1 4係圖1 3其中一數位處理模組之端視圖; 圖1 5係沿著圖1 4之數位處理模組之剖面線A - A 所取之部分截面圖; 圖1 6係一槪要示意圖,其中顯示當軟片待處理時, 用以控制軟片之位置及方向之另一種設計; 圖1 7係用以控制軟片之位置及方向之另一變化設計 之槪要示意圖; 圖1 8係本發明之示例性軟片運送膠帶之頂視圖,其 中該膠帶係連結有軟片帶; 圖1 9係依照本發明之示例性軟片運送膠帶及所連結 之軟片與顯影劑之截面視圖,其中顯示該膠帶係由轉輪所 移動; 圖2 0係一截面視圖,其中顯示依照本發明將軟片施 配至一示例性軟片運送膠帶之方式; 圖2 1係一截面視圖,其中顯示本發明將軟片邊緣施 配至一對示例性軟片運送膠帶之方式; 圖2 2係一截面視圖,顯示本發明將軟片邊緣施配至 一對示例性運送膠帶之方式,其中膠帶係加以反折; 圖2 3係一槪要示意圖,其中顯示一示例性數位軟片 顯影系統,其係採用軟片運送膠帶來運送軟片; 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X 297公釐) -11 - I-----:---:---- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498692 A7 Β7 五、發明說明(9 ) 圖2 4係本發明之示例性數位軟片顯影系統之立體視 圖,其中該系統係採用一前導帶以穿引及運送軟片; (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 圖2 5係圖2 4之立體視圖,其中顯示依照本發明之 原理將該前導帶係反折回去而與軟片再次連接; 圖2 6係圖2 4之立體視圖,其中顯示依照本發明之 另一特徵之可分離式前導帶係疊接至軟片之前緣及末緣; 圖2 7 Α係依照本發明之可自行對正軟片滾輪之立體 視圖; 圖2 7 B係圖2 7 A之滾輪的側視圖; 圖2 7 C係圖2 7 A之滾輪的端視圖; 圖2 8係一本發明之示例性數位軟片顯影系統之槪要 視圖,其係採用一疊接的軟片前導帶,且其包括垂直運送 部分,以增加軟片顯影時間;以及 圖2 9係一槪要示意圖,其中顯示一示例性數位軟片 顯影系統,該系統係具有一單一掃描站以及一對雙向絞盤 驅動器。 元件對照表 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 1 0 0 :數位軟片處理系統 1 0 0 :掃描系統 1 0 2 :光學感應器 1 0 4 :影像 1〇5 :輸出裝置 1〇6 :透鏡 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公釐) 498692 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7_五、發明說明(1CD) 1〇8 :影像 1 1〇:光源 1 1 1 :射線源 112:照像軟片媒體 1 1 2 :顯影軟片 1 1 4 :個別位置 116:電路封裝或裝置 1 1 6 B :背面感應器1 1 6 F :感應器1 1 8 :電纜1 2 0 :電腦 2 1 6 :正面光源2 1 7 :射線 2 1 8 :背面光源2 1 9 :射線 2 2 0 :顯影軟片2 2 0 A :軟片 2 2〇B :軟片2 2 0 S :鬆驰部位 2 2 2 :反射射線 2 2 4 :反射射線 2 2 6 :軟片正面 2 2 8 :軟片背面 2 3〇:射線 -14 -----Γ — ll·^-----------訂---------線-φ- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498692 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(11 ) 2 3 4 :暗銀色顆粒 2 3 6 :銀金屬顆粒 2 3 8 :顆粒 2 4 0 :射線 2 4 2 :紅色層 2 4 4 :綠色層 2 4 6 :藍色層 3 0 0 :數位處理系統 3 0 1 :單一處理裝置 3 0 2 :掃描模組 3 0 3 :系統 3 0 4 :掃描模組 3 0 5 :數位處理系統 3 0 6 :掃描模組 3 0 8 :掃描模組 3〇9 a :運送系統 3 0 9 b :運送系統 3 0 9 c :運送系統 3 1 0 :顯影劑施配器 3 1 2 :位置 3 1 4 :位置 3 1 9 :安裝板 320:軟片輸入表面 322:軟片輸出表面 丨!I;丨_it--------訂---------線# (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 木紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 4^1 498692 A7 B7 五、發明說明(12) 3 2 3 :軟片運送組件 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 架 桿 件 描引 件口口 殼 輪 掃件導件組開開 面外 轉 片引片引衝入出件 表送 輪 動 軟導軟導緩輸輸組 或運 齒 驅輪輪 向形片方緣片片片引片口 方達纜桿動輪輪片轉轉桿桿 方弓軟下邊軟軟軟導垂凹上馬電軸連齒齒軟::軸軸 45678902346001246800024 22222233333455555566666 33333333333333333333333 -----f.— -----------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498692 A7 B7 Ή五、發明說明()3 6 6 :底部 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 78901012345000024680124 66677 8 88888900000001111 33333333333344444444444 輪面 滾表 緣 側 組 件件 口 置向模 道構構 開器裝方器 槽引引 描合塡向覆向筒 位露導導 掃離裝橫塗方滾 部外片片 央放片片縫長擦殼考片軟軟 中釋軟軟槽縱刮外參軟:: ·_····*· ·♦ ·_ · · * · · · · □ 開 0J 0J Γ B1 殼板板 外活活 桿臂 件 軸 弓 弓 或導 導 軸片承方達 樞軟軸上馬 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注咅心事項再填寫本頁) --------訂---------線. 498692 A7 B7 五、發明說明(14)4 1 6 :滑輪 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 構構 構構 機機 機機 輪輪 輪 輪帶帶 站站 滾 滾輪輪滾 滾 導導 描描 構 擠 擠轉轉擠 擠 前前緣 緣 掃掃 機輪輪夾 夾面面夾 夾帶緣緣邊點邊 面面 輪承緣動轉轉動桿一背正二桿三導前末端接導形背正 滑軸邊驅::驅軸第::第軸第前::末疊前弓:: ·······「T | ······「Τ 一···· ···-〕 ^lx ······· B F 89202234566789000123466 11233333333333444444444 44444444444444444444444 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498692 A7 B7 1 R五、發明說明()4 4 7 :前緣邊緣 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 旦且 且 器 模模模 動輪 輪 像像向像向 點器輪輪驅滾 滾面器器側映映方映方 帶帶 接緣筒輪緊鏈鏈盤擠輪擠表配接緣一二前三後帶膠膠 疊末滾滾拉::鉸夾滾夾外施疊前第第向第向膠:: • ···· · · . · . _ ··· · · . · . · . · . · . · · · .··· . · ··<·· 89202224567802624567000 44566666666677700000222 44444444444444455555555 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498692 A7 B7 五、發明說明(16) 5 2 1 :側緣 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 輪 器器 滾 緊配 動 拉施 驅輪輪 輪輪 記輪/應 筒力滾滾輪滾滾 孔標轉孔劑 緣緣 面 器供器捲擦別別滾別別 輪緣齊動輪影緣側側邊表膠面動帶合集磨個個用個個 鏈側對驅鏈顯邊::滾上黏表驅膠結收高::備:: .............. A B ·· ······_·_ · · · · ab · · a b 23467800025602824000222 22222233333346677000000 55555555555555555666666 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498692 A7 B7 17, 五、發明說明(1/) 6〇4 :滾輪 6 0 6 :高磨擦力驅動滾輪 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 帶 皮 源源嘴源源 源源 輪力 件件 光光噴光光件件光光 滾擦 帶組組站面面劑面面引引面面 導導器 用磨輪輪片帶帶影正背影正正導導背背帶波波應輪 備高滾滾軟皮皮顯::顯............皮::感滾 : .. : : : : : :a- 3 · . 3 .0 3 _ Oa, 3 · · 3 ID : ·. 8024801222466778899901 ον t—I r-H r-H t—I T—H t—I t—I t—I t—H r-H r—I r—I t-H CV1 CV1 6777888888888888888888 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 χ 297公釐) 20 498692 A7 B7 五、發明說明(18)8 2 2 :感應器 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 器器 組組 波組波帶 帶 輪輪 嘴 濾輪濾皮 皮 滑滑 位噴 組組或滑或 之帶帶 之帶帶之之 部劑 輪輪 輪置輪鏡動鏡帶開皮皮輪開皮皮開開輪輪口影輪滑滑 滑位滑透驅透皮隔::滾隔::隔隔滾滾入顯滑:: ··· · · · · · · ······ · ra" · ···ra, · · · · · · · ······ · Qa- 34567890001222357901000 22222223333333333344555 88888888888888888888888 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) Ά 498692 A7 B7 19、 五、發明說明(·Ί 8 5 1 :進入/離開部位 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製498692 A7 _ B7 V. Description of the Invention (Technical Field) The present invention relates generally to film scanning, and more particularly, to methods and equipment for transporting, positioning, and scanning films in a digital film scanning system. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION Color photographic films are generally The system contains three layers of light-sensitive materials, which can sense red, green and blue light, respectively. During the development of the conventional color photographic film, the exposed film is chemically processed to produce dyes in three layers. Its color density is recorded on the film in proportion to the light reflected by the photographic scene. Exposure time of the upper blue, green and red spectra. The yellow dye is formed on the upper layer, the magenta dye is formed on the middle layer, and the blue-green dye is formed on the lower layer. The combination of the formed dyes can show a hidden image. Once the film has been developed, a separate printing process can use the developed film and photographic paper to record photographic images. Unlike traditional film development, digital film development technology or coefficient film processing systems have been developed. In such systems, chemically developed exposure films are used to form a scene composed of silver metal particles or particles in each of the red, green and blue recording layers of the film. Then, while the film is being developed, it is scanned using electromagnetic radiation, wherein the radiation preferably has a specific frequency and more preferably an infrared frequency range. In detail, when the film is developed corresponding to a chemical developer, one light source is irradiated to the front side of the film, and the other light source is irradiated to the back side of the film. The elemental silver particles (eg, blue photosensitive layer) developed in the upper layer can be used by the front light source. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before (Fill in this page) I! I — Order ----- IIII — Printed at the Employee Consumption Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 4 Printed at the Employee Consumption Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (210 X 297 mm) 498692 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (2) The reflected light is seen from the front of the film; however, these particles are basically hidden on the back of the film. Similarly, the elemental silver particles developed in the bottom layer (for example, the red light-sensitive layer) are seen from the back side of the film by the light reflected by the back-side light source; however, these particles are substantially hidden on the front side. At the same time, the elemental silver particles in the intermediate layer (for example, the green photosensitive layer) are hidden by the light emitted from the front or the back; however, these particles can be seen by any light that penetrates the three layers, Like the particles in the other two layers. For each pixel position, it is necessary to sense the light reflected from the front and back of the film and the light transmitted through the film. Therefore, three measurements are needed for each pixel. Three measurements for each pixel can solve three colors, so that each pixel has a three-color code, and then multiple pixels with color can be printed or displayed, so that people can view the image . If necessary, the scanning of each coordinate point on the film can be performed several times during the development of the film. Therefore, the coordinate point pattern that can be quickly displayed during development can be recorded, and the pattern of the coordinate point will not be displayed before the film is developed. The plurality of digital image files can then be combined to form a single enhanced image file. In order to allow the same image to be scanned multiple times during the development of a digital film, multiple scanning devices are required, each scanning device scanning during different development periods of the film. Preferably, this multiple scanning system can be easily modified, upgraded, and repaired 'to meet the needs of the user. For example, there is a demand in a digital film development system, that is, it can be completed quickly in the system in the shortest shutdown time (please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) --- --- 丨 —Order --- I--I-- 丨 ----- 498692 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (3) Simple and easy component addition, removal and / or replacement. The transport of each film in a digital film development system is usually more troublesome than the conventional film transport system. In particular, the film must be able to be transported smoothly and efficiently to provide optimized imaging results. Since the optical system used in the digital film development system has a relatively narrow depth, it is important to carefully control the position, direction, and movement of the portion of the film to be scanned, that is, when the film is to be scanned, It is very important to accurately locate and maintain the film in place, and to avoid touching or scratching the film's hidden areas in the film. When the film is jammed or distorted when it is transported through the system, it will cause the system to malfunction, so these situations also need to be avoided or resolved. In addition, it is preferable that the conveying system allows the part containing the hidden image in the film to be completely covered by a uniform developer layer during development, while reducing the transport between the developer and the conveying equipment. In addition, the transport system is preferably capable of processing a variety of different types and sizes of film without obscuring any part of the film that contains hidden images during scanning. There is also a need for this film transport system, especially when it uses a multiple scanning device, that is, it can pass the film through various different scanning devices without having to manually repeat it. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An advantage of at least one embodiment of the present invention is that 'the positioning of the film is precisely controlled when the film is transported and scanned. In at least one embodiment of the present invention, it provides an easy-to-upgrade paper size applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) ------- 丨 Order --------- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy 498692 A7 ________B7____ V. Description of the Invention (4) and digital film processing system for maintenance. An advantage of at least one embodiment of the present invention is that it can use a single digital film development system to process films of various sizes. (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) The advantage of at least one embodiment of the present invention is that the information on the side of the film can be scanned and applied by a digital film processing system. An advantage of at least one embodiment of the present invention is that it can reduce the operation of manually passing the film through a digital film developing system. Another advantage of at least one embodiment of the present invention is that the film can be driven through a digital film developing system without requiring too many driving devices. According to a feature of the present invention, printed by a consumer cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, it provides a digital film development system including a first film scanning module for supplying rays to the film, and sensing the light reflected by the film. The ray and a second film scanning module are used to supply the ray to the film and sense the ray reflected by the film. A buffer assembly can be positioned between the first and second scanning modules, and the buffer assembly can include an opening through which the film can be moved. The components of each module can be mounted on a mounting member, and the mounting member is mounted on the frame of a housing. Each mounting member can be detached from the bone frame 'to remove the module from the system. According to another feature of the present invention, it provides a film transport system 'which moves the exposed film through a processing device so that the film contains a hidden scene > the central portion of the image is not hindered in any way during processing. The conveying system of the present invention can also avoid contact between the central part of the film and the processing equipment, so that the film will not be scratched during processing. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 (Public love) 498692 A7 ____B7 V. Description of invention (5) Main part. The transport system of the present invention does not hinder the light from reaching the film (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). The central part of the path is particularly advantageous for digital film processing systems. No direct contact is formed between the processing equipment and the central portion of the film, which further prevents contamination of the developer applied to the central portion of the film. The delivery system of the present invention can also provide flexibility to handle films of various sizes. When used as a scanning device for digital film processing, one feature of the present invention is to provide precise control over the position and orientation of the portion of the film to be scanned. This control can prevent the film from being moved improperly during the development process, and can improve the quality of the scanned image formed. According to another feature of the invention, a method is provided for transporting films through a scanning system. The method involves attaching a flexible film tape to a tape and engaging only the tape, and passing the tape through a scanning mechanism 'to generate a digital image file. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs According to another feature of the present invention, it provides a method for transporting films through a digital film developing system. In this method, the leading edge of a leading tape is connected to the leading edge of a film tape, and the leading tape passes through a film conveying system, which is used to move the leading tape and the connected film. A developer is applied to the film so that the film begins to develop. The developing film is supplied with rays, and the rays reflected by the developing film are sensed. According to another feature of the present invention, a transport mechanism is provided for transporting a film and a front guide belt. The mechanism system includes a pair of opposite sprocket wheels. The sprocket system has teeth and can be engaged with a sprocket hole in a film belt. The mechanism may also include a roller, which is connected to the sprocket, and is used to support the size of the paper. Chinese national standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498692 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (6) Wipe a Leading band. The leading band is preferably narrower than the film and can be aligned by the rollers. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) According to another feature of the present invention, it provides a digital film developing system, which includes a developer dispenser for applying developer to the film, a The light source is used to supply rays to the developing film, and a sensor is used to detect the rays reflected by the developing film. A single driving mechanism is used to move the developing film through the light source and the sensor. Those skilled in the art can understand other advantages of the embodiments from the following description. The exemplary embodiments shown and described are only for the purpose of illustrating the present invention. As will be understood below, the invention has various features and embodiments without departing from the scope of the invention. Therefore, the advantages, diagrams, and descriptions described in this description are for the purpose of illustration without any limitation. Brief description of the drawing Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Although the features of the invention have been specifically pointed out in the scope of patent application, it is generally believed that the invention can be sealed by the following description and the accompanying drawings It is further understood that in the drawings, the same component numbers are used to mark different components. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of an exemplary embodiment of a digital film developing system. The system is compatible with the method and apparatus of the present invention. Fig. 2 shows an exemplary operation mode of the digital film developing system of Fig. 1; Fig. 3 shows an exemplary modular digital film developing system according to the present invention; (%) The paper size printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498692 A7 ------- B7____ 5. Description of the invention (7) 'its It has a plurality of scanning stations or modules; FIG. 4 is a body view of a modular digital film developing system made according to the present invention; FIG. 5 is a side view of the digital film developing system of FIG. 4; A three-dimensional view of an exemplary film buffer assembly according to the present invention, wherein the buffer assembly has a shutter plate (shown in the figure in its closed position), and the assembly uses a scanning module of a modular digital film development system. Between groups; Fig. 7 is a perspective view of the film buffer assembly of Fig. 6, wherein the shutter plate is in an open position; Figs. 8a and 8b show the shutter plate of Fig. 6 rotating between a closed position and an open position FIG. 9 is a perspective view of an exemplary arched film transport and guide assembly according to the present invention, which is used in a digital film development system; FIG. 10 is another of the film transport and guide assembly of the present invention. Partial perspective view of the embodiment, which is used in a digital film developing system; FIG. 11 is a side view of another embodiment of a film transport and buffer system made according to the present invention; FIG. Side view of another embodiment of a film transport system; FIG. 13 is a side view of a digital film developing system according to the present invention; FIG. 13 is a schematic view showing an exemplary belt designed according to the present invention The state where the component is in contact with the film strip to be shipped;-• ----- l · .— K ^ ----------- order --------- line — U (Please (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) 498692 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention Description (8) Figure 1 3 B is a schematic diagram showing one of the designs according to the principles of the present invention Another implementation of one side of a flexible film captured by a conveyor belt ; 1 3 C-based view of another example of the present invention, a display system for after several film strip passed through the single processing unit. Fig. 14 is an end view of one of the digital processing modules of Fig. 13; Fig. 15 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the section line A-A of the digital processing module of Fig. 14; It is a schematic diagram showing another design for controlling the position and direction of the film when the film is to be processed. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of another design for controlling the position and direction of the film; FIG. A top view of an exemplary film transport tape of the present invention, wherein the tape is connected to a film tape; FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view of an exemplary film transport tape according to the present invention and the connected film and developer, showing the tape Is moved by a runner; FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view showing the manner in which the film is dispensed to an exemplary film transport tape according to the present invention; FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view showing the edge of the film applied by the present invention Figure 2 2 is a cross-sectional view showing the manner in which the present invention applies a film edge to a pair of exemplary shipping tapes, wherein the tapes are folded back; Figure 2 3槪 A schematic diagram showing an exemplary digital film development system, which uses film transport tape to transport films; this paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X 297 mm) -11-I ---- -: ---: ---- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 498692 A7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (9) Figure 2 4 is a perspective view of an exemplary digital film developing system of the present invention. The system uses a leading tape to guide and transport the film; (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Figure 25 is a perspective view of Figure 24, which shows the leading tape according to the principle of the present invention It is folded back and reconnected with the film; FIG. 26 is a perspective view of FIG. 24, which shows the detachable leading tape according to another feature of the present invention is superimposed on the leading edge and the trailing edge of the film; FIG. 2 7 A is a perspective view of a self-aligning film roller according to the present invention; FIG. 2B is a side view of the roller of FIG. 2A; FIG. 2C is an end view of the roller of FIG. 2A; Essentials of an Exemplary Digital Film Development System of the Present Invention A view, which uses a stacked film leading tape, and includes a vertical transport section to increase the film development time; and FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram showing an exemplary digital film development system, which has A single scanning station and a pair of bi-directional winch drives. Component comparison table Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy 1 0 0: Digital film processing system 1 0 0: Scanning system 1 2 2: Optical sensor 1 0 4: Image 10 5: Output device 106: Lens This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 × X 297 mm) 498692 Printed by A7 B7 of the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (1CD) 108: Image 1 10: Light source 1 1 1: Ray source 112: Photographic film medium 1 1 2: Developing film 1 1 4: Individual location 116: Circuit package or device 1 1 6 B: Back sensor 1 1 6 F: Sensor 1 1 8: Cable 1 2 0: Computer 2 1 6: Front light source 2 1 7: Ray 2 1 8: Rear light source 2 1 9: Ray 2 2 0: Development film 2 2 0 A: Film 2 2 0B: Film 2 2 0 S : Relaxed part 2 2 2: Reflected ray 2 2 4: Reflected ray 2 2 6: Front side of the film 2 2 8: Back side of the film 2 30: Ray-14 ----- Γ — ll · ^ ----- ------ Order --------- Line-φ- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) %) 498692 A7 B7 Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau's Consumer Cooperatives V. Invention Description (11) 2 3 4: Dark silver particles 2 3 6: Silver metal particles 2 3 8: Particles 2 4 0: Rays 2 4 2: Red layers 2 4 4: Green Layer 2 4 6: Blue layer 3 0 0: Digital processing system 3 0 1: Single processing device 3 0 2: Scan module 3 0 3: System 3 0 4: Scan module 3 0 5: Digital processing system 3 0 6: Scanning module 3 0 8: Scanning module 309 a: Conveying system 3 0 9 b: Conveying system 3 0 9 c: Conveying system 3 1 0: Developer dispenser 3 1 2: Position 3 1 4: Position 3 1 9: Mounting plate 320: film input surface 322: film output surface 丨! I; 丨 _it -------- Order --------- Line # (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Wood paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) 4 ^ 1 498692 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (12) 3 2 3: Film transport assembly Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Employee Consumption Cooperative Printed frame rod tracing parts mouth shell wheel scanning parts guide Piece group open surface, outer turn piece, lead piece, pull in and out of the table, send wheel, move soft guide, soft guide, slow delivery, or tooth drive wheel, wheel profile, edge edge piece, piece lead, mouth, cable rod, move wheel, turn Rotary rod square bow soft bottom soft guide soft recessed electric shaft with tooth teeth soft :: shaft 45678902346001246800024 22222233333455555566666 33333333333333333333333 ----- f .-- ----------- order-- ------- Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498692 A7 B7 Ή5. Description of the invention () 3 6 6: Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs at the bottom 7890012345000024680124 66677 8 88888900000001111 33333333333344444444444 Wheel surface Roller surface edge side component mouth is set to the mold channel structure opener device square device slot guide drawing combination facing to the cylinder position exposed guide sweep away from the horizontal coating square roller part outer sheet centrally placed sheet long slit wipe shell The test piece is soft and soft and the middle release is soft and the groove is longitudinally scraped. The external reference is soft :: _ Open the outer lever arm shaft of the outer plate of the shell plate. 0J 0J Γ B1 Bow bow or guide shaft bearing plate Fang Dashu soft shaft mounted on the paper size applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the note on the back before filling out this page) --- ----- Order --------- line. 498692 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (14) 4 1 6: Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy Roller belt belt stand station Roller Roller Roller Roller Guide guide Trap squeeze squeeze to turn squeeze Squeeze front leading edge sweeper Wheel wheel clamp face surface clamp edge edge point edge surface wheel bearing edge rotating rotation lever One back, two poles, three guides, front end, guide back, positive slide shaft, side drive :: drive shaft :: the front of the shaft :: the front of the last stack :: ······ 「T | ····· ·· 「Τ I ... ^ lx ...... BF 89202234566789000123466 11233333333333444444444 44444444444444444444444 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498692 A7 B7 1 R V. Description of the invention () 4 4 7: Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economics of the Frontier Edge and printed by the mold mold and the mold wheel. Wheel Drive Roller Roller, Side, Side, Side, Side, Side, Side, Side, Wheel, Tight Chain, Chain, Squeeze, Wheel, Table, Edge, One, Two, Three, and Back Former directional glue: • ······ ·. ·. _ ··· · · · · · · · · · · · · · ····· 89202224567802624567000 44566666666677700000222 44444444444444455555555 (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498692 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (16) 5 2 1: Side edge Consumer Cooperatives, Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed wheel device is tightly coupled with the pull drive wheel wheel wheel wheel wheel / response cylinder force roller wheel roll hole mark hole hole edge edge surface device feeder roll do not roll do not roll do not align wheel flange side The side surface rubber surface moving belt collection grinds each one with each chain side to drive the chain to show the edge :: Roll on the sticky surface to drive the glue to close up :: Preparation :: .............. AB ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · ab · · ab 23467800025602824000222 22222233333346677000000 55555555555555555666666 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) The paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498692 A7 B7 17, V. Description of the invention (1 /) 604: Roller 6 0 6: High friction drive roller Printed with leather source nozzle mouthpiece source wheel force Pieces of light light spray light pieces of light light rolling belt group group surface surface surface guide surface surface guide surface grinding wheel wheel belt belt shadow positive back shadow positive guide back strap wave wave should be prepared high roll Soft skin skin display :: show ............ skin :: roll: ..:::::: a- 3 ·. 3 .0 3 _ Oa, 3 · · 3 ID: ·. 8024801222466778899901 ον t—I rH rH t—IT—H t—I t—I t—I t—H rH r—I r—I tH CV1 CV1 6777888888888888888888 (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this Page) This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 χ 297 mm) 20 498692 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (18) 8 2 2: Sensors Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Group group wave group belt belt wheel wheel nozzle filter wheel filter leather slippery spraying group Open the wheel wheel mouth shadow roller slide sliding position translucent drive transdermal barrier :: roll barrier :: roll barrier into the slippery slide :: ··· · · · · · · · · · · · · ra " · · · · ·· ra, · · · · · · · · · · · · · · Qa- 34567890001222357901000 22222223333333333344555 88888888888888888888888 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) Ά 498692 A7 B7 19. V. Description of the invention (· Ί 8 5 1 : Entry / Exit Location Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives, Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs

件 輪 輪輪輪 /*/ - ΤΠ1Ί-rp- iu-m - Fr- 引輪輪 輪輪輪輪輪位滑滑轉轉件 桿 面 輪輪導滑滑點滑滑滑滑滑部轉轉動動組 軸 表 輪滑滑換口 配轉轉轉轉轉開開惰惰驅驅動輪輪定縫制 滑::轉入施樞惰惰惰惰離離........驅滾滾固狹控 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498692 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(2(D) s 1 :縱向側緣 S 2 :縱向側緣 示例性實施例之pyg說明 大體而言’本發明係關於軟片之數位處理,尤其係用 以運送及掃描軟片以實現該數位處理之模組、元件、及/ 或方法。 依照一特徵’本發明係提供一種模組化數位軟片處理 系統’其係包括複數個掃描模組,以由顯影軟片中得到數 位景> 像。每一模組係具有一安裝板或外殼,可使掃描及運 送元件固定於其上。因此,每一模組係可以藉由處理該安 裝板而輕易地移入及移出該系統。再者,該模組係具有大 致相同的元件及外形,使得模組可以視使用者需要而被移 除、更換或添加,以提供簡易的升級及維修。 在模組之間係可提供一緩衝組件,以避免軟片因爲在 模組之間不同的速度而卡住或扭曲。該緩衝組件係可包括 一活門板機構,其係可以打開而呈現一開口,以使該軟片 可以通過該開口而自由地移動。在此一方式中,在軟片上 之任何不當的壓力或張力皆可以被釋放。 在此亦針對軟片掃描系統而提供一軟片運送及導引組 件,其係用以當軟片被掃描時可以拉緊該軟片,以提供軟 片位置之精確控制性,進而得到最佳的掃描效果。在一實 施例中,該軟片係藉由提供分離式驅動轉輪來提供拉張力 ,其中該分離式轉輪係以不同之速度轉動。亦可提供一釋 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -------— ------------訂---------線"41^" (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 498692 A7 ________B7___ 五、發明說明(21 ) 放離合器’以避免使軟片過度地拉張。在此一示例性實施 例中’該軟片係藉由將其驅動通過一弓形軟片桿架而形成 圓弧狀,以提供最佳的軟片控制。 本發明之另一特徵係關於一種軟片之運送系統。在一 示例性方式中’本發明係採用兩對分離的皮帶,一對位在 軟片帶上方’而另一對則係位在軟片帶下方。此兩對皮帶 係僅由軟片之橫向部分所銜接,而留下軟片之中央部分並 被碰觸。這不僅可以避免軟片包含影像之部分被刮傷,且 亦有助於顯影劑沉積在軟片之中央部分,並且軟片之中央 部分可以曝露於光線,這對於數位軟片處理之運送系統係 特別地具有優點。本發明之另一特徵係藉由使該軟片在掃 描期間向前抵住一轉動弓形控制表面,而在數位軟片處理 上具有特別的優點。該控制表面係形成一影像平面,並且 確保軟片在掃描期間係定位及定向在一經過小心控制之平 面上。當該系統之光學元件係具有較窄的視深時,如同一 般數位處理裝備中之光學元件,此一定位及定向係特別地 具有其優點。 依照本發明之另一特徵,其係藉由將膠帶連結至軟片 ,而使軟片可以運送通過一掃描系統。一般而言,該膠帶 接著係可以藉由一軟片運送系統來加以銜接並移動之。當 膠帶移動通過一掃描機構時,一數位影像便可以由黏接在 膠帶上之軟片而產生。由於軟片並未被碰觸,因此顯影劑 便可以均勻地施加至軟片的整個表面。再者,最好該膠帶 之寬度係足以配合具有各種不同寬度或規格的軟片,而使 QA- -----·---U------------訂---------線-4^- (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) 498692 A7 B7 五、發明說明(22) 得相同的掃描及運送系統可以與許多不同類型之軟片配合 使用。該膠帶最好係可使由掃描機構所提供之射線穿透, 以使其不會干擾到掃描程序。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本發明之另一特徵係關於一種利用一前導帶來將軟片 運送通過一數位軟片顯影系統之方法。該前導帶之末緣係 可以連結至該軟片之前緣,且該前導帶係可以穿過該軟片 運送系統。軟片運送系統係移動該前導帶及所連結之軟片 。顯影劑係供應至軟片,以造成該軟片顯影。在掃描期間 ’射線係供應至顯影軟片,且將顯影軟片所反射之射線加 以偵測,以產生一數位影像。前導帶之前緣可以連結至軟 片之末緣,以形成一連續環圈。爲了對正該前導帶,其係 可以使用一具有冠狀滾輪及一對鏈輪之滾輪機構。該鏈輪 係運送該軟片,同時較窄的前導帶則係由冠狀滾輪所支撑 及對正。可採用一單一驅動裝置來拉動該軟片及所連結之 前導帶通過數位軟片顯影系統,以避免使用過多的驅動裝 置,並降低軟片卡住之風險。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 圖1係顯示一改良型數位軟片處理系統1 〇 0之實施 例。該系統係藉由將由一影像之電磁射線轉換成一表示該 影像之電子影像(數位)。欲掃描之影像通常係位在一攝 影軟片媒體1 1 2上,其中該攝影軟片媒體1 1 2係利用 化學顯影劑來加以顯影。在許多應用中,用以將影像轉換 爲數位型式之電磁射線係紅外線;然而,可見光、微波或 其他適當類型之電磁射線亦可用以產生數位化影像。舉例 來說,其可以採用可見光,諸如在美國專利申請第6 0 / 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 5& 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498692 A7 B7___ 五、發明說明(23) 1 7 3,7 5 5號中所揭露者,以及在美國專利申請第 0 9/_,名稱爲"利用可見光之數位軟片顯影之改 良式系統及方法〃(代理人檔案編號A S F 9 9 3 2 4號) ,其內容在此援引爲參考。該掃描系統1 0 0大體上係包 括數個光學感應器1 0 2,其係測量通過該顯影軟片 1 1 2或由其反射之電磁能量的強度。電磁能量供應源通 常係一光源1 1 0,其係用以照射內含欲加以掃描之影像 1 0 4及1 0 8之軟片1 1 2,該影像係在顯影期間形成 在軟片上。由光源1 1 0發出之射線係會擴散或者由額外 的光學元件來加以導引,諸如濾波器或波導(圖上未顯示 ),以及/或一個或以上之透鏡106,其係定位在光學 感應器1 0 2與軟片1 1 2之間,以更均勻地照射該影像 1 0 4 及 1 0 8。 光源1 1 0係定位在該軟片1 1 2其相對於光學感應 器1 0 2之表面上。此一配置方式係可使該光學感應器 1 0 2偵測由該光源1 1 〇發出之射線其通過軟片1 1 2 上之影像1 0 4及1 0 8時的強度。另一射線源1 1 1係 可以配置在該軟片1 1 2與光學感應器1 0 2相同的那一 面。當射線源1 1 1啓動時,光學感應器1 0 2便可偵測 到由該影像1 0 4及1 0 8所反射之射線。利用兩光源配 置在待掃描之軟片相對兩表面上之方法,係稱之爲雙重掃 描,此將在以下配合圖2來詳加說明。 光學感應器1 0 2大致上係呈陣列配置,使得撞擊在 每一光學感應器1 0 2上之電磁能量係對應於在影像 06-_ I----•卜 —--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 498692 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(4) 1 0 4上之一個別位置1 1 4。因此,在影像1 0 4中之 每一個別位置1 1 4便對應於在一掃描影像或數位檔案中 之個別位置,其稱之爲圖素,或者係簡稱爲"像素",其中 該檔案係由複數個像素資料所構成。在軟片1 1 2上之影 像1 0 4及1 0 8接著便可相對於光學感應器1 〇 2而移 動’或者係加以掃描。該光學感應器1 〇 2通常係內裝在 一電路封裝體或裝置1 1 6中,其係藉由電纜1 1 8而電 性連接至儲存及數位影像處理之支援電子裝備,在圖上係 與一^電腦1 2 0組合在一^起。電腦1 2 0接著便處理該數 位影像資料,並將其顯示在一輸出裝置1 〇 5上。或者, 光學感應器1 0 2係可以由一微處理器或控制器來加以取 代,而電纜1 1 8則可以由一電性連接件來加以取代。 光學感應器1 0 2係可以由各種不同材料及藉由各種 不同方法來製成,以偵測具有各種變化部分及電磁光譜之 頻寬的電磁射線。舉例來說,光學感應器1 0 2係包含一 光電偵測器,其係可產生一正比於撞擊在該光電偵測器上 之電磁能量強度的電子訊號。因此,該光電偵測器便可以 測量出由軟片1 1 2上之影像1 0 4及1 0 8所衰減之電 磁射線的強度。 如前所述,且如圖2所示,本發明在此所說明之實施 例係採用雙重軟片掃描,其係利用一正面光源2 1 6及一 背面光源2 1 8而分別以射線2 1 7及2 1 9來掃描該顯 影軟片2 2 0。所施加之射線2 1 7及2 1 9便會造成由 軟片2 2 0之正面2 2 6反射之射線2 2 2以及由背面 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------— j------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498692 A7 B7轮 轮 轮 轮 轮 / * /-ΤΠ1Ί-rp- iu-m-Fr- Pulley wheel wheel wheel wheel wheel slippery turn piece face wheel wheel guide slippery point slippery slippery part rotation rotation group Axle, table, wheel, slide, slip, switch, turn, turn, open, idle, idle, drive, drive, wheel, fixed, sewing, slip :: turn into the pivot, idle, idle, idle .............. Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498692 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Invention Description (2 (D) s 1: longitudinal side edge S 2: pyg description of the exemplary embodiment of the longitudinal side edge Generally speaking, the present invention relates to the digital processing of films, and in particular to a module for transporting and scanning films to realize the digital processing Group, component, and / or method. According to a feature, the present invention provides a modular digital film processing system, which includes a plurality of scanning modules to obtain a digital scene image from a developing film. Each mode The system has a mounting plate or housing to which the scanning and shipping components can be fixed. A module system can be easily moved in and out of the system by processing the mounting plate. Furthermore, the module system has approximately the same components and outlines, so that the module can be removed, replaced or replaced according to the needs of the user. Added to provide easy upgrades and maintenance. A buffer assembly can be provided between the modules to prevent the film from being jammed or distorted due to different speeds between the modules. The buffer assembly can include a shutter plate mechanism It can be opened to present an opening so that the film can move freely through the opening. In this way, any improper pressure or tension on the film can be released. Scanning for the film is also performed here The system provides a film transport and guide assembly, which is used to tension the film when it is scanned to provide precise control of the film position, thereby obtaining the best scanning effect. In one embodiment, the The flexible film is provided with a tension by providing a separate driving wheel, wherein the separate wheel is rotated at different speeds. It is also possible to provide an explanation of the paper size. China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 X 297 mm) --------- ------------ Order --------- Line " 41 ^ " (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The paper size printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 public love) 498692 A7 ________B7___ V. Invention Explanation (21) Release the clutch 'to avoid excessive tensioning of the film. In this exemplary embodiment,' the film is formed into an arc shape by driving it through an arched film lever frame to provide the best Film control. Another feature of the present invention relates to a film transport system. In an exemplary mode, the present invention uses two separate pairs of belts, one pair above the film strip 'and the other pair below the film strip. The two pairs of belts are only joined by the transverse portion of the film, leaving the central portion of the film and being touched. This not only avoids scratches on the part of the film containing the image, but also helps the developer to deposit on the central part of the film, and the central part of the film can be exposed to light, which is particularly advantageous for digital film processing transport systems . Another feature of the invention is that it has particular advantages in digital film processing by having the film abut against a rotating bow control surface during scanning. The control surface forms an image plane and ensures that the film is positioned and oriented on a carefully controlled plane during scanning. When the optical components of the system have a narrow depth of field, such as the optical components in digital processing equipment, this positioning and orientation system has its advantages in particular. According to another feature of the invention, the film can be transported through a scanning system by attaching the tape to the film. Generally, the tape can then be engaged and moved by a film transport system. As the tape moves through a scanning mechanism, a digital image can be generated from a soft film adhered to the tape. Since the film is not touched, the developer can be evenly applied to the entire surface of the film. Furthermore, it is preferable that the width of the tape is sufficient to match the flexible sheets with various widths or specifications, so that QA- ----- · --- U ------------ order-- ------- line-4 ^-(Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) 498692 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (22) The same scanning and shipping system can be used with many different types of Use with film. The tape is preferably made to penetrate the radiation provided by the scanning mechanism so that it does not interfere with the scanning process. (Please read the cautions on the back before filling out this page.) Another feature of the present invention relates to a method for transporting a film through a digital film developing system using a leader tape. The leading edge of the leading tape can be connected to the leading edge of the film, and the leading tape can pass through the film transport system. The film transport system moves the leading tape and the connected film. A developer is supplied to the film to cause the film to develop. The rays are supplied to the developing film during scanning, and the rays reflected by the developing film are detected to generate a digital image. The leading edge of the leading band can be connected to the trailing edge of the film to form a continuous loop. In order to align the front guide belt, a roller mechanism having a crown roller and a pair of sprocket wheels can be used. The sprocket system transports the film, while the narrower front guide belt is supported and aligned by a crown roller. A single driving device can be used to pull the film and the connected leading tape through the digital film developing system to avoid using too many driving devices and reduce the risk of film jams. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Figure 1 shows an example of an improved digital film processing system 1000. The system converts electromagnetic radiation from an image into an electronic image (digital) representing the image. The image to be scanned is usually located on a photographic film medium 1 12, wherein the photographic film medium 1 12 is developed using a chemical developer. In many applications, the electromagnetic radiation used to convert the image to a digital type is infrared; however, visible light, microwaves, or other suitable types of electromagnetic radiation can also be used to generate digital images. For example, it can use visible light, such as in US Patent Application No. 60 / This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 5 & Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Staff Consumer Cooperatives of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498692 A7 B7___ V. Invention Description (23) 1 7 3, 7 5 5 and those disclosed in US Patent Application No. 0 9 / _, Named " an improved system and method for developing digital film using visible light (agent file number ASF 9 9 3 2 4), the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. The scanning system 100 generally includes a plurality of optical sensors 102, which measure the intensity of electromagnetic energy passing through or reflected by the developing film 1 12. The electromagnetic energy supply source is usually a light source 1 10, which is used to illuminate a film 1 12 containing images 104 and 108 to be scanned, which is formed on the film during development. The rays emitted by the light source 110 are diffused or guided by additional optical elements, such as filters or waveguides (not shown in the figure), and / or one or more lenses 106, which are positioned at the optical sensor Between the device 102 and the film 1 12 to illuminate the images 104 and 108 more uniformly. The light source 1 10 is positioned on the surface of the film 1 12 opposite to the optical sensor 102. This configuration method enables the optical sensor 10 to detect the intensity of the rays emitted by the light source 1 10 as they pass through the images 104 and 108 on the film 1 12. Another ray source 1 1 1 can be arranged on the same side of the film 1 1 2 as the optical sensor 102. When the radiation source 11 is activated, the optical sensor 10 can detect the rays reflected by the images 104 and 108. The method of arranging two light sources on opposite surfaces of a film to be scanned is called double scanning, which will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 2. The optical sensors 102 are roughly arranged in an array, so that the electromagnetic energy hitting each optical sensor 102 corresponds to the image 06-_ I ---- • 卜 ---------- --Order --------- line (please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) 498692 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (4) 1 0 4 Individual position on the previous 1 1 4. Therefore, each individual position 1 1 4 in the image 104 corresponds to an individual position in a scanned image or digital file, which is called a pixel, or simply " pixel ", where the The file is composed of a plurality of pixel data. The images 104 and 108 on the film 1 12 can then be moved relative to the optical sensor 102 or scanned. The optical sensor 10 is usually built in a circuit package or device 1 16 which is electrically connected to storage and digital image processing support electronic equipment through a cable 1 18, which is shown in the figure. Combined with a ^ computer 1 2 0. The computer 120 then processes the digital image data and displays it on an output device 105. Alternatively, the optical sensor 102 can be replaced by a microprocessor or a controller, and the cable 1 18 can be replaced by an electrical connector. The optical sensor 102 can be made of a variety of different materials and by various methods to detect electromagnetic radiation with various changing parts and the bandwidth of the electromagnetic spectrum. For example, the optical sensor 102 includes a photodetector, which generates an electronic signal that is proportional to the intensity of the electromagnetic energy impinging on the photodetector. Therefore, the photodetector can measure the intensity of the electromagnetic rays attenuated by the images 104 and 108 on the film 1 12. As mentioned above, and as shown in FIG. 2, the embodiment of the present invention described herein uses dual film scanning, which uses a front light source 2 1 6 and a back light source 2 1 8 and ray 2 1 7 respectively. And 2 1 9 to scan the developing film 2 2 0. The applied rays 2 1 7 and 2 1 9 will result in rays 2 2 2 reflected from the front side 2 2 6 of the film 2 2 0 and from the back side. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Li) -------- j ------------ Order --------- line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 498692 A7 B7

OR 五、發明說明() (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 2 2 8所反射之射線2 2 4,以及穿透該軟片2 2 〇之所 有層體的穿透射線2 3 0及2 4 0。雖然光源2 1 6及 2 1 8係可以發射出多色光(亦即,多種頻率的光線), 然而在本實施例之數位軟片處理系統1 〇 〇中,該光源 2 1 6及2 1 8最好係發射出單色光,尤以紅外線爲佳。 所形成之射線2 2 2、2 2 4、2 4 0及2 3 0在此分別 稱之爲正面、背面、正面穿透及背面穿透射線,且其將在 下文中做進一步的說明。 在圖2中’在顯影期間,於顯影軟片2 2 0中係可看 出不同的色層,亦即紅色層242、綠色層244以藍色 層246。詳言之,在一空白的軟片基部232上係具有 三個層體242、244、246,其分別可以感應紅色 、綠色及藍色光。這些層體實際上並非爲這些顏色;相反 地,其只是可感應出這些顏色。在習知的彩色軟片顯影中 ,該藍色感應層2 4 6係會逐漸地顯示出一黃色的色素, 而綠色感應層2 4 4則係顯示出紫紅色色素,而紅色感應 層2 4 2則係顯示出藍綠色色素。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 在軟片2 20之顯影過程中,層體242、244及 2 4 6係發出乳白色光線。在上層2 4 6中顯影之暗銀色 顆粒2 3 4,(藍色層),係可以藉由射線2 2 2而由軟 片之正面看出,且由於大量的顯影感光乳劑,其亦可以由 背面2 2 8略微地看到。同樣地,在下層2 4 2 (紅色感 光層)中之顆粒2 3 6係可以藉由反射之射線2 2 4而由 背面2 2 8看出,但其較無法由正面2 2 6看出。在中間 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 2S--- 498692 A7 B7 五、發明說明() (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 層2 2 4 (綠色感光層)中之顆粒係僅可以由正面2 2 6 或背面2 2 8藉由反射之射線2 2 2、2 2 4略微地看到 。然而,其係可以藉由穿透射線2 3 0及2 4 0而在其他 層體中被看到。藉由感應由正面2 2 6及背面2 2 8所反 射之射線以及穿透該軟片之正面2 2 6及背面2 2 8之射 線,在軟片2 2 0中之每一像素便可以獲得四個測量値, 而可以針對三原色,紅、綠及藍色以數學方式加以解析, 而使其得以最接近原始之影像。舉例來說,其係可以利用 矩陣轉換方式來加以解析,如在美國專利第 5 5 1 9 5 1 0號中所揭露者,其內容在此援引爲參考。 正面訊號係記錄由軟片2 2 0正面之正面光源2 1 6 所反射回來的射線2 2 2。針對一影像之該組正面訊號係 稱之爲正面頻道(F)。該正面頻道基本上,但非全然, 係記錄由光源2 1 6發出之射線由於在最上層2 4 6 (亦 即,藍色記錄層)中之銀金屬顆粒2 3 4而被衰減之射線 。該正面頻道亦記錄某些由於在紅色及綠色層2 4 2、 2 4 4中之銀金屬顆粒2 3 6、2 3 8而被衰減之射線。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 背面訊號係記錄由軟片2 2 0正面之背面光源2 1 8 所反射回來的射線2 2 4。針對一影像之該組背面訊號係 稱之爲背面頻道(B)。該背面頻道基本上,但非全然, 係記錄由光源2 1 8發出之射線由於在最下層2 4 2 (亦 即,紅色記錄層)中之銀金屬顆粒2 3 6而被衰減之射線 。該背面頻道亦記錄某些由於在藍色及綠色層2 4 6、 2 4 4中之銀金屬顆粒2 3 4、2 3 8而被衰減之射線。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498692 A7 B7 07 五、發明說明() 該正面穿透訊號係記錄由軟片2 2 0之背面的背面光 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 源2 1 8所發射而穿透顯影軟片2 2 0之射線2 3 0。針 對一影像之該組正面穿透訊號係稱之爲正面穿透頻道(T )。同樣地,背面穿透訊號係記錄由軟片2 2 0之正面的 正面光源2 1 6所發射而穿透顯影軟片2 2 0之射線 2 4 0。針對一影像之該組背面穿透訊號係稱之爲背面穿 透頻道(T )。正面光源2 1 6係可以在記錄面訊號及背 面穿透訊號的第一瞬間來加以充電,而背面光源2 1 8則 係可以在記錄背面訊號及正面穿透訊號的分開的瞬間來加 以充電。兩穿透訊號基本上係皆記錄相同的影像資訊,因 爲其皆係記錄由於在軟片2 2 0之三個紅、綠及藍色層 242、244、246中之銀金屬顆粒234、236 、238而被衰減之射線230、240。因此,其中一 穿透頻道係可忽視之。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 接著便可以利用數個影像處理步驟,而將每一頻道( B、F及T )之照射源射線轉換成在軟片2 2 0上之每一 位置點的紅、綠、藍値。這些步驟的進行係因爲在顯影步 驟期間所形成之銀金屬顆粒2 3 4、2 3 6、2 3 8,並 非係在每一軟片層242、244、246中所具有之專 屬光譜。當採用習知掃描器以在軟片顯影之後掃描該軟片 時’通常係不會進行這些影像處理步驟,因爲軟片藉由習 知化學彩色顯影所形成之染料係專屬於每一軟片層,且該 銀金屬顆粒2 3 4、2 3 6及2 3 8亦無法進行習知的掃 描。然而’如同習知之掃描器,一旦初始的紅、綠及藍値 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) --- 498692 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) A7 B7 oo 五、發明說明() 針對每一影像而形成時,其通常係會進一步處理紅、綠及 藍値’以強化、操控、顯示及/或沖印該影像。在本系統 中可以採用之影像處理步驟係揭露在美國專利申請第〇 8 / 9 9 9 4 2 1號及美國專利第5 2 6 6 8 0 5號中,其 內容在此援引爲參考。 在圖1及圖2所示之數位軟片顯影系統之示例性實施 例’係可以在不同的軟片顯影期間針對相同的畫面影像來 產生複數個數位影像檔,每一影像檔係具有背面、正面及 穿透値,其係利用上述之雙重掃描方法而得到。在不同的 顯影期間針對相同畫面來產生複數雙重掃描影像檔係相當 具有優點的,其可使得在不同影像期間所顯現的畫面影像 的形可以被記錄下來。在軟片顯影期間,影像最明亮的部 分(亦即,軟片其曝露於最強光線之部分)係會比軟片其 曝光於較低強度光線的部分(諸如在軟片上對應於原始景 像之陰影部分)還先顯影。因此,對於軟片上曝光於較低 強度光線之陰影或其他部分,係需要有較長的顯影時間以 使其完全地顯影,以藉此使得這些部分可以更詳細地顯示 出來。然而,較長的顯影時間亦會降低影像之明亮部分的 細節及其他形狀。在習知的軟片顯影中,顯影時間係必須 加以選擇,且該顯影時間通常係視顯影的期間而定,而在 影像之最明亮部分、陰影部分及其他形狀顯影時間之間做 折衷式地選擇。利用習知軟片掃描器來掃描此一顯影軟片 ,將無法顯示出這些依靠時間來顯影之細部特徵。然而, 在圖1及圖2之數位顯影方法中,欲不需要做此一折衷式 _____^- -------—-— --------訂—-----線"41^- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498692 A7 B7_ 〇〇 五、發明說明() 地選擇,因爲同一影像之數位影像檔係會在許多顯影期間 中被產生出來,且這些多重影像係可以組合而產生一強化 影像。 爲了實現此一影像之雙重掃描,如圖3所示,依照本 發明之一特徵,其係可以利用多個分離式掃描模組3 0 2 、304、306及308,以針對同一影像來產生多個 數位影像檔。在數位處理系統3 0 0中之每一模組3 0 2 、304、306及308係包括一正面光源2 16、背 面光源2 1 8、一正面感應器1 1 6F、一背面感應器 1 1 6 B,其係依照如圖1及圖2所述之方式來加以操作 。詳言之,現請參照圖2及圖3,該正面感應器1 1 6 F 係偵測反射射線2 2 2 (由正面光源2 1 6所產生),並 且亦可偵測穿透射線2 3 0 (由背面光源2 1 8所產生) 。同樣地,該背面感應器2 1 6 B係偵測該反射射線 2 2 4 (由背面光源2 1 8所產生),以及穿透射線 240 (由正面光源2 16所產生)。 現請參照圖3,示例性之模組3 0 2、3 0 4、 306及308係串聯在一起而構成系統300。詳言之 ,每一模組302、304、306及308係具有一安 裝構件或面板3 1 9 ,其可使該模組之各種不同的元件固 定安裝於其上。每一面板3 1 9係有一軟片輸入表面 3 2 0以及一軟片輸出表面3 2 2。此外,每一模組 302、304、306及308亦具有一軟片運送或導 引組件3 3 3,其具有一用以接收該軟片之軟片輸入開口 53-- -------— -------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A7 B7__ λ门 五、發明說明() 3 3 0,以及一用以使軟片離開之軟片輸出開口 3 3 2。 舉例來說,每一軟片運送組件3 3 3係可形成一狹縫,而 可使軟片之一邊緣由該狹縫穿過。因此,軟片之邊緣便可 以被承載於兩個具有槽縫之導軌或邊緣導引件之間。該第 一模組3 0 2之軟片輸入開口 3 3 0係在軟片已由一適當 之顯影劑施配器3 1 0施加顯影劑之後而接收該軟片。該 第一模組3 0 2之軟片輸出開口 3 3 2係與第二模組 3 0 4之軟片輸入開口 3 3 0相連接,且該第二模組 3 0 4之軟片輸出開口 3 3 2係與第三模組3 0 6之軟片 輸入開口 3 3 0相連接。同樣地,第三模組3 0 6之軟片 輸出開口 3 3 2係與第四模組3 0 8之軟片輸入開口 3 3 0相連接。因此,軟片係沿著由第一模組3 0 2至第 二模組3 0 4至第三模組3 0 6至第四模組3 0 8之方向 3 2 4來加以運送。最後,軟片2 2 0係經由第四模組 3 0 8之軟片輸出開口 3 3 2而離開系統3 0 0。 軟片2 2 0係以連續長條帶之方式經由模組3 0 2、 304、306及3〇8之軟片運送組件333而藉由適 當的軟片致動器、輸送帶等等裝置來加以運送,這些裝置 之示例性實施例將在下文中說明之。由於在模組3 0 2、 3 0 4、3〇6及3 0 8之間之顯影軟片2 2 0上的影像 運送的延遲’因此每一'模組係在軟片2 2 0顯影期間的不 同顯影時間來掃描及記錄一給定影像之數位影像檔。 舉例來說,在軟片2 2 0上之每一影像或畫面,諸如 位在位置3 1 2及3 1 4之間的畫面F,係可以藉由顯影 33---- *------— ^------------訂·--------線 i^w. (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -^ 498692 A7 B7 五、發明說明() (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 劑施配器3 1 0來施加顯影劑。運送致動器接著便可以將 畫面F經由第一模組3 0 2之軟片運送組件3 3 3來加以 移動,而在此時便產生一第一數位影像檔,其中該數位影 像檔係利用兩個反射訊號(一背面反射訊號以及一正面反 射訊號)以及一穿透訊號(一背面穿透訊號或一正面穿透 訊號),如先前針對雙重掃描所說明者。該畫面F接著便 被運送至第二模組3 0 4,且在該處針對相同影像而產生 一第二數位影像檔,再次地,其係藉由具有兩個反射訊號 及一穿透訊號之雙重掃描方式來達成。然而,由於在將畫 面F由第一模組3 0 2運送至第二模組3 0 4之預定之時 間延遲,因此該畫面F便會在畫面F之影像顯影期間之較 後面的時間點來進行掃描。藉此,在軟片2 2 0之顯影期 間該影像有可能顯現之某些特徵,便有可能係被補捉在該 第一數位影像檔中,但在第二數位影像檔中卻不會出現, 且反之亦然。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 其他模組3 0 6、3 0 8亦可連接至系統3 0 0中, 以在畫面F之其他顯影時間來提供額外的數位影像檔。舉 例來說,在藉由第二模組3 0 4而針對畫面F產生第二數 位影像檔之後,便可以藉由第三模組3 0 6而在後面的顯 影時間中利用兩個反射訊號及一穿透訊號而產生一第三數 位影像檔。同樣地,一第四數位影像檔亦可藉由第四模組 3 0 8而在最長的顯影時間中來產生,其同樣係藉由兩個 反射訊號及一穿透訊號而產生。在此一方式中’同一畫面 影像之四個數位影像檔便可以在四個不同的顯影時間分別 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 498692 A7 __B7____ 五、發明說明(32) 產生,例如,總顯影時間之2 5 %、5 Ο %、7 5 %及 1 0 0 %。此四個數位影像檔接著便可以彼此相互組合( 亦即,複合在一起),以構成影像之複合數位表示畫面。 此一數位畫面係可以顯示在一與電腦相連接之錄影顯示器 ,或者由一連接至電腦之列印機(諸如一雷射列印機或噴 墨列印機)印製出來,或者係儲存成檔案,及/或藉由一 通訊聯結來進行通訊。 如圖3所示,依照本發明之一特徵,每一模組3 0 2 、3 0 4、3 0 6及3 0 8係與系統3 0 0分開的。因此 ,雖然圖示之系統3 0 0係具有四個模組,然而該系統亦 可以視使用者之需要而簡易地提供少於或多於四個之模組 。舉例來說,若使用者僅需要三個模組以節省成本時,該 第四模組3 0 8便可以與第三模組3 0 6脫離而由系統中 移除。 針對整個系統3 0 0係可提供一外殼,且每一模組 302、304、306及308係可藉由將每一模組之 面板3 1 9安裝至外殼中,而視需要使每一模組移入或移 出該系統。由於每一模組之各個元件(例如,2 1 6、 218、116F、116Β、333)係需要直接或間 接地固定至安裝面板3 1 9上,因此整個模組係可以藉由 控制該面板3 1 9之安裝來加以處理;藉此,模組之個別 元件便不需要分別處理,因此便可以簡易地修改整個系統 3 0 0。做爲安裝面板3 1 9之一變化實施例,其亦可以 採用其他安裝構件或外殼,以將單一模組之各個元件加以 ^- ------,L---j------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498692 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 固定,以易於操作處理。 在移除或增添一個或更多模組上,其亦可以稍加修改 。舉例來說,藉由將模組3 0 8由系統3 0 0上移除,該 系統便僅會產生三個數位影像檔,一個係由模組3 0 2所 產生,一個係由模組3 0 4所產生,而另一個則係由模組 3 0 6所產生。因此,藉由取消模組3 0 8,整個系統 3 0 0之成本便會降低,且具有較小的尺寸。 若將模組3 0 8移除,其便可以調整可使其餘模組 3 0 2、3 0 4、3 0 6形成數位影像檔之軟片顯影時間 ,使得這些模組可以在軟片顯影過程中之最佳時機來形成 數位影像檔。可以利用數種方法來調整形成數位影像檔之 軟片顯影時間,諸如藉由調整軟片運送緩衝系統、軟片速 度及/或其餘模組3 0 2、3 0 4及3 0 6之形狀或間隔 〇 做爲示例性系統3 0 0之彈性調整之實例,若模組 3 0 2、3 0 4、3 0 6及3 0 8其中一模組需要修理時 ,則損壞的模組係可以藉由移除其安裝面板3 1 9而輕易 地由系統3 0 0中移除。最好,所有模組係具有大致相同 之元件,且每一元件係具有致相同的外型設計,使得損壞 模組之更換不會妨礙到系統的操作。舉例來說,若模組 3 0 6需要修理時,則模組3 0 6便可以移除,並且以一 大致完全相同之工作模組來加以更換。因此,甚至當模組 3 0 6損壞時,系統3 0 0在模組3 0 6移除而送修之後 ,其仍可以持續運作。因此,在模組3 0 6由系統3 0 0 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) -----^— Γ —--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) 498692 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 中移除送修時’ s亥軟片2 2 0之處理亦可持續進行。藉此 ,該系統3 0 0不會因爲該模組3 0 2、3 0 4、3 Ο Θ 及3 0 8其中一兩個故障而無法運作。 因此,依照本發明之一特徵,由於該模組3 0 2、 3 0 4、3 0 6及3 0 8之可移除性及標準化設計,系統 3 〇 〇便可具有彈性,且易於升級或維修。 圖4及圖5係顯示圖3之模組化數位顯影系統之細部 結構的示例性實施例。在此一實施例中,除了照射源 216及218、感應器電路板116F及116B、安 裝面板3 1 9、以及軟片運送/導引組件3 3 3以外,該 四個模組3〇2、304、306及308亦包括一對光 學裝置1 10 6B及106F。如前所述,該光學裝置 1 1 06B及1 06F係用以將光源2 1 6及2 1 8所發 出之射線聚集在個別之感應器1 1 6 B及1 1 6 F上。 如圖4及圖5所示,亦可提供一軟片裝塡裝置3 8 0 ,以將軟片輸入至系統3 0 0中,並且若有需要,亦可切 割該軟片及/或一前導長條帶。軟片裝塡及切割致動器係 可用以輔助軟片之切割及裝塡。該致動器係可包括馬達、 電磁控制器以及其他適當的裝置。在圖4中亦顯示一槽縫 塗覆器模組3 8 2,其係包括一槽縫塗覆頭3 1 0,用以 供應顯影劑至軟片上,以及包括一槽縫塗覆器刮擦滾筒 3 8 4,其係用以在施加顯影劑之前先淸潔該軟片。該槽 縫塗覆器模組3 8 2之元件亦係固定於一面板3 1 9上, 以易於移除及處理。相同於掃描模組3 0 2、3 0 4、 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) *------— ------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498692 A7 B7____ 五、發明說明(35) 3 0 6及3 0 8,該槽縫塗覆器模組3 8 2亦包括一軟片 運送組件3 3 3,用以運送該軟片。 在圖4 5所示之示例性系統3 0 0中,該模組3 8 2 、302、304、306及308係藉由將安裝面板 3 1 9連接至一骨架3 0 1上而固定在系統3 0 0中,其 中該骨架最好係具有穿孔以收納插銷或其他連接機構,以 將安裝面板固定至骨架上。整體系統3 0 0係位在外殼或 匣體3 8 5中,其係提供一黑暗環境,以供軟片顯影,且 若有需要,其亦可使系統一體式地結合及移動。 依照本發明之另一特徵,且如圖4及圖5所示,最好 一軟片緩衝組件3 2 9係定位在每一模組3 8 2、3 0 2 、3〇4、306及308之軟片運送組件333之間, 以針對在模組之間的軟片的張力及/或鬆驰狀態進行補償 ,並且軟片可以進一步在模組之間顯影。如圖4及5所示 ,這些軟片緩衝組件3 2 9係可做爲額外的軟片導引或導 軌,其係與模組302、304、306及308之軟片 運送組件3 3 3連接成一線,並且配置在組件3 3 3之導 軌之間。該軟片緩衝組件3 2 9係可包括一可樞轉的活板 門或平台,而可使軟片於其上移動。詳言之,如在圖6之 示例性實施例所示,該軟片緩衝組件3 2 9係包括一緩衝 器外殼4 0 2,其係可使該組件之各種元件固定於其上。 該外殻4 0 2係包括一活板門開口 4 0 4,軟片可經由該 開口而露出。爲了覆蓋此一開口,因此提供一可移動的軟 片平台或活板門4 0 6,其係經由一樞軸或軸桿4 0 8而 -- - .—^------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) 498692 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(36) 可轉動地連接至外殼4 0 2,而使其可以在關閉位置與打 開位置之間移動,其中在該關閉位置上,該軟片活板門 4 0 6係覆蓋該開口 4 0 4,而在打開位置,該活板門則 係向下延伸通過該開口 4 0 4。當在此一關閉位置時,如 圖6所示,該軟片係在活板門4 〇 6與一上方導引件 4 1 2之間移動,其中該上方導引件係覆蓋該活板門 406且固定至外殼402上方。 爲了使該活板門4 0 6繞著中心軸4 0 8而在打開與 關閉位置之間轉動,其係提供有一馬達4 1 4或其他致動 器,在本示例性實施例中,其係一步階馬達。該馬達 4 1 4係安裝至一馬達安裝板4 0 3,該馬達安裝板 4 0 3係經由螺絲而固定於緩衝器外殼4 0 2。滑輪 4 1 6及4 1 8以及滑輪皮帶4 1 7係用以將馬達4 1 4 聯結至軸桿4 0 8。該滑輪4 1 8係與一軸承4 1 9而安 裝在軸桿4 0 8上。同樣地,該滑輪4 1 6係安裝於馬達 4 1 4。轉動該馬達4 1 4係可使該銜接滑輪4 1 6及 4 1 8之滑輪皮帶4 1 7移動,而造成該軸桿4 0 8移動 ,進而使得該活板門4 0 6在打開及關閉位置之間轉動。 亦可採用其他變化方式以在模組之間提供緩衝器開口。舉 例來說,該活板門4 0 6係可以在一打開位置與關閉位置 之間滑動,以露出該開口。 一對軟片導引臂4 1 0係連接至活板門4 0 6,且大 致垂直於該活板門4 0 6,如圖6及圖7之示例性實施例 所示。當活板門4 0 6係位在圖6所示之關閉位置’且該 ___-3a---- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) . I V------------訂---------線·^^"· (請先間讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498692 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7_____ 五、發明說明(37) 軟片係在活板門4 0 6與上方導引件4 1 2之間移動時, 該軟片導引臂4 1 0係向上延伸。然而,當活板門4 0 6 在選定的時間藉由馬達4 1 4之作用力而向下移動時,該 軟片導引臂4 1 0係向下移動,直到在臂部4 1 0末端之 軸承4 1 1貼靠於外殼4 0 2之邊緣4 2 2爲止。因此, 如圖7所示,該軟片係在軸承4 1 1與邊緣4 2 2之間移 動,並且自由地向下移動通過該開口 4 〇 4,因爲此時該 活板門4 0 6並未覆蓋該開口。圖8 a係顯示這些元件之 關閉位置,且該軟片2 2 0係位在活板門4 0 6與上方導 引件4 1 2之間。圖8 b係顯示打開位置,其中該活板門 406係不再覆蓋該開口 404,且軟片202係可以自 由地向下移動通過該開口 4 0 4。然而,爲了防止顯影中 之軟片2 2 0連結在一起而有可能妨礙到軟片顯影,因此 該軟片係在軟片導引臂4 1 0之軸承4 1 1與開口 4 0 4 之邊緣4 2 2之間向下移動。因此,該軟片便可以鬆弛地 通過該開口 4 0 4,但其藉由軟片導引臂4 1 0所控制。 該軟片2 2 0之鬆弛部分亦可加以控制,且包含在軟片凹 槽臂400L及400R之間,如圖5 — 7所示。 藉此,當活板門4 0 6係位在關閉位置時,該軟片係 可以穿過該軟片運送組件3 3 3之所有部分。然而,請參 照圖4及圖5 ,在緩衝組件3 2 9中之門板係可以由一關 閉位置移動至一打開位置,以使軟片可以朝向模組3 8 2 、302、304、306或308之底部而向下露出。 因此,若各個模組382、302、304、306及 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----------------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 4& 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A7 B7 五、發明說明(38) 3 0 8之軟片驅動致動器在軟片2 2 0之速度或移動上具 有略微地差異時,因而造成軟片在導軌組件上卡住或扭曲 變形時,則軟片2 2 0便可以向下移動通過該活板門 4 0 6曾經定位在該處之開口,並且使該軟片進入至外露 槽道4 0 0,其中該槽道4 0 0係由一對軟片導引構件 4 0 0 L及4 0 0 R所形成。藉此,系統3 0 0將不會產 生故障,且所進行之軟片顯影程序亦可以持續進行而不會 中斷,以藉此降低維修關機時間及相關的成本。 圖9及圖1 0係顯示軟片導引/運送組件3 3 3之兩 個示例性實施例,其係可以使用在圖3、4及5之模組化 軟片顯影系統之任何一個模組3 8 2、3 0 2、3 0 4、 3〇6及3 0 8中。一上方運送外殼3 4 0係包括在每一 組件3 3 3中,其係固定至一下方軟片導引件3 2 7。該 顯影軟片係被傳送且導引於上方運送外殼3 4 0與下方軟 片導引件3 2 7之間,諸如藉由將軟片移動通過一形成在 外殼3 4 0與下方軟片導引件3 2 7之間的槽縫。 該下方軟片導引件3 2 7係包括一弓形軟片掃描桿架 325,其具有一中央掃描開口 370。該軟片在掃描期 間係移動通過該掃描桿架3 2 5,但位在運送外殼3 4 0 下方。射線係通過該開口 3 7 0而連續成列地掃描該顯影 軟片。因此,藉由導引該軟片通過該掃描桿架325 ,軟 片之縱緣便可以在施加射線之部位上形成弧形之形狀。該 弓形掃描桿架3 2 5可以係呈弧形之形狀,其係具有圓形 之特性,且其半徑係大約爲1 · 〇 〇至2 · 0 0英吋。然 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) ----—----------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A7 ___B7 _ 五、發明說明(3<?) 而,其亦可以採用其他具有固定或可變半徑之弓形形狀。 由於軟片係具有可撓性,如同照相軟片一樣,當其移動通 過弓形掃描桿架3 2 5時,其係呈現弓形之形狀。藉由將 軟片以彎曲或弓形形狀之方式加以定位,其便可以精確地 控制該軟片上表面之位置,這在數位軟片顯影時提供良好 的掃描結果係相當重要的,這使得掃描設備(例如,一光 源及/或感應器)係可以精確地定位在該軟片預定所在之 深度位置上。在一弓形或彎曲之軟片表面上之張力,係有 可能會使軟片翹曲、彎曲或扭曲或呈現無法控制之形狀, 這有可能會影響到該感應器所感應到之射線,並進而造成 不準確的數位影像資料。詳言之,在一弓形表面上拉張該 軟片係會降低軟片由該表面往上翹曲或者係呈現無法控制 之形狀的風險,因而使得掃描設備無法對準在軟片上之影 像。相反地,將軟片定位在一平坦表面上係較不好的,因 爲軟片會很容易由該表面向上翹曲。 圖1 1係顯示軟片220當其由光源2 1 6及2 1 8 以及感應器1 1 6 F與1 1 6 B所掃描時之不例性弓形形 狀。在位置A與B之間,該軟片2 2 0係呈現一大致爲弓 形之形狀。在軟片2 2 0上之張力係由轉輪3 6 0A與 3 6 0 B所提供,或者係諸如鏈輪或滾輪之其他運送元件 ,其係銜接該軟片並將其驅動通過該掃描桿架3 2 5。射 線係由光源2 1 6與2 1 8經由掃描開口 3 7 0而供應至 軟片。爲了提供此一張力,轉輪3 6 0 B係被驅動而轉動 地比轉輪3 6 0 A還略快一些,此將在下文中詳細說明。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 χ 297公釐) ---------I------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 42- 498692 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(4C)) 在掃描期間使該軟片2 2 0放置成弓形形狀的其他設計亦 可以採用。舉例來說,圖1 2係顯示使用一弓形構件 3 2 3之例子’其中該軟片2 2 0係在該弓形構件3 2 3 上被傳送。 請再次參照圖9及圖1 0之示例性實施例,該軟片運 送組件3 3 3係包括驅動機構及連桿,以迫使該該軟片通 過該弓形掃描桿架3 2 5。更確切地說,一馬達3 5 0或 其他適當的驅動機構或致動器,係用以供應驅動力,以在 運送外殻3 4 0與下方軟片導引件3 2 7之間來傳送該軟 片。馬達3 5 0係可以由一步階馬達所構成,其亦可稱之 爲步階器馬達。此一馬達係將電性脈衝轉換成一軸桿或主 軸之不連續的機械運動。軸桿轉動之速度係與輸入脈衝之 頻率直接相關,且轉動之長度係與所供應之輸入脈衝數量 有關。利用步階馬達之一優點係在於其可以精確控制而不 需要封閉迴路控制器或與其連結之昂貴的感應及反饋裝置 。由於每次所供應之脈衝皆會造成在轉動之已知增量步階 ,馬達之位置便可以藉由持續追蹤供應至馬達之輸入脈衝 數量而得知。一電纜3 5 1係可用以供應電子控制訊號至 馬達3 5 0。此一控制訊號係可以藉由一程式化微處理器 或控制器來加以控制,其係用以控制軟片移動通過該組件 3 3 3、以光源來掃描軟片之動作以及藉由感應器來產生 像素資料。舉例來說,圖1之電腦1 2 0係可用以控制這 些操作,以及控制經由電纜3 5 1而傳送控制訊號至馬達 3 5 0的動作。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ---------.------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 4^ 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A7 B7__ 五、發明說明(41 ) 爲了將馬達3 5 0之旋轉運動傳送至軟片驅動轉輪 3 6 〇,因此提供有任何適當之連接件或連桿構件。在圖 9及1 〇之示例性實施例中’馬達3 5 0係驅動一軸桿 3 5 2,其係具有一連動齒輪3 5 4連接至該軸桿。該連 動齒輪3 5 4係銜接一對齒輪3 5 8及3 5 6,其係分別 連接至軸桿3 6 2與3 6 4。一對軟片驅動轉輪3 6 0係 連接至每一軸桿3 6 2及3 6 4。分隔件3 6 1及其他適 當的連接構件係用以沿著軸桿3 6 2及3 6 4來配置該轉 輪3 6 0。轉輪3 6 0係可包含磨擦轉輪或夾擠滾輪,其 中每一轉輪3 6 0之底部3 6 6係與靠近軟片邊緣之上表 面相接觸,並且將軟片夾持在轉輪3 6 0與一表面3 6 8 之間,以藉此將軟片迫入至圖9及圖1 0所示之軟片運送 組件3 3 3之下方軟片導引件3 2 7與運送外殼3 4 0之 間。在圖9之實施例中,該表面3 6 8係位在四個滾輪 3 6 7上。這些滾輪3 6 7係可以朝向下方軟片導引件 3 2 7之側緣3 6 9而向外擴開。藉由將滾輪3 6 7向外 擴開,軟片便可以在掃描期間在軟片之橫向方向3 8 1上 被拉張,以藉此避免該軟片扭曲或呈現無法控制之形狀, 進行提供最佳化的掃描結果。 在圖9及1 0之示例性實施例中亦顯示,當軟片由光 源掃描時,最好該軟片在縱長方向3 8 3上係呈現拉緊的 狀態。詳言之,齒輪3 5 6及3 5 8之尺寸係設計成可使 得軸桿3 6 2的轉動速度略小於軸桿3 6 4。最好,軸桿 362與364之速度相差至少1·5個百分比,且最好 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) I------—-------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) 44 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A7 _B7___ 五、發明說明(42) 係5至1 2個百分比。這造成了當軟片成列地通過開口 3 7 0而由光源來加以掃描時,在軸桿3 6 2與軸桿 3 6 4之間之軟片被拉張。如上所述,且依照本發明之另 一特徵,軟片之拉張係可用以確保在掃描過程期間,該軟 片係被精確地定位。在掃描期間軟片之扭曲或翹曲係會造 成影像資料的不精確。軟片上之張力最好係大約爲〇 . 5 盎司至1 0盎司,且最好係4盎司至1 4盎司,若爲8盘 司至1 2盎司則更佳,然而亦可施加任何不會撕破軟片之 張力。藉由提供齒輪3 5 6及3 5 8具有不同的齒數,便 可以達到不同的速度。舉例來說,齒輪3 5 6係可以具有 1 6 8齒,而齒輪3 5 8則係具有1 8 0齒,因而提供了 1 6 8對1 8 0之傳動比。 爲了避免由於轉動軸桿3 6 2與3 6 4在速度上的差 異所造成之軟片的撕裂,一釋放離合器3 7 1或其他磨擦 裝置係可用以將齒輪3 5 8由連動齒輪3 5 4上來加以釋 放。詳言之,當在軸桿3 6 2上之力矩由於軟片被軸桿 3 6 4拉張而到達一預定値時,該釋放離合器3 7 1便會 將齒輪3 5 8由連動齒輪3 5 4上加以釋放。該釋放離合 器3 7 1係可包含任何適當的釋放機構,其係可以在施加 過度負載力矩値時,釋放一齒輪及/或降低力矩。舉例來 說,適當的釋放離合器係可包括彈簧構件、磨擦裝置、滑 動板及/或球體元件等業界所習知的裝置。因此,當受到 一過度負載之力矩時,該釋放離合器3 7 1係可以造成軸 桿3 6 2相對於軸桿3 5 2而滑動。會造成釋放離合器 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----------------------訂---------線"^^1 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 4& 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A7 B7 五、發明說明(43) 3 7 1滑動之過負載力矩値係該軟片張力以及驅動輪直徑 之函數。做爲釋放離合器3 7 1及驅動齒輪3 5 6及 3 5 8之變化實例,其他可以維持軟片上之張力而不會撕 裂該軟片之機構皆可以採用。 除了中央掃描開口 3 7 0以外,其亦提供有一參考區 域3 9 0。經由該參考區域3 9 0所傳送之媒體係可以被 掃描,以提供一參考或標的部位,藉此,由掃描列3 7 0 所掃描之影像便可進行修正、校正、正常化或其他的處理 〇 雖然在圖9及1 0中係顯示示例性軟片運送/導引系 統及元件,然而其他系統及元件亦可用以驅動及運送該軟 片。舉例來說,軟片係可以藉由單一軸桿而非一對軸桿來 加以驅動,且張力亦可以藉由阻止軟片向前移動來加以提 供。再者,轉輪3 6 0係可包含鏈輪,其係與軟片邊緣上 之開口相銜接。做爲另一變化實施例,取代與軟片直接地 銜接,該轉輪3 6 0亦可以與一輸送帶或皮帶相銜接,而 該輸送帶或皮帶接著再連接至軟片或支撐該軟片。再者, 一滾輪或鉸盤亦可用以驅動該軟片。其他適當的連桿機構 亦可以採用,諸如皮帶,以將動能由驅動機構傳送至軟片 。再者,除了運送在圖9及1 0中所示之元件以外,其他 滾輪、轉輪、主軸、捲軸及相關裝置亦可以使用在圖3、 4及5所示之系統中’以完成將軟片經由系統來運送的操 作。 以下將參考圖4 - 1 0來說明示例性軟片顯影系統之 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----- —-------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 44 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A7 ___ B7 44 五、發明說明() 操作。詳言之,若有需要,利用馬達4 1 4來打開或關閉 活板門4 0 6之操作係可以藉由手動方式來達成,或者係 在感應到一特定狀態之後自動地進行,諸如在感應到軟片 扭曲或卡住時,或者係在感應到軟片已經到達特定位置時 來自動地進行。舉例來說,一旦軟片已經到達在第一模組 3 0 2之定位時,介於槽縫塗覆器模組3 8 2與第一模組 3 0 2之間之軟片緩衝組件3 2 9之活板門4 0 6便可以 經由控制器傳送出一控制訊號而打開。(軟片之位置係可 以藉由任何適當之感應器來偵測,諸如一紅外線感應器) 。接著,在槽縫塗覆器模組3 8 2中之馬達3 5 0便可啓 動以持續驅動該軟片,同時在第一模組3 0 2中之馬達 3 5 0便可中止運轉。因此,軟片將向下進入至介於模組 3 8 2與3 0 2之間的外露槽道4 0 0中。一旦該軟片之 預定量已經外露出來,或者模組3 8 2之馬達已經驅動一 段時間,第一模組3 0 2之馬達3 5 0便可以再次地活動 ,且該軟片係可以進一步朝向該第二掃描模組3 0 4來傳 送。當軟片到達第二掃描模組3 0 4、第三掃描模組 3 0 6及第四掃描模組3 0 8之預定位置上時’其亦同樣 地進行軟片外露程序。因此,在不同模組3 8 2、3 0 2 、3 0 4、3 0 6及3 0 8之間的軟片將會存在有鬆弛部 位2 2 0 S,如圖5所示。這些部位2 2 0 S係會減輕軟 片扭曲或卡住的情況,其中該扭曲及卡住情況係由於在不 同模組中具有不同的軟片驅動速度所造成。再者’這些鬆 弛區域係會使得軟片在模組之間具有額外的顯影時間’而 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----------·------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498692 A7 __B7 五、發明說明(45) 不需要增加系統3 0 0之尺寸或者係降低數位軟片顯影過 程的速度。這些額外的顯影時間係可以藉由改變可以外露 於鬆弛區域中之軟片長度來加以調整。 如上所述,在此一示例性實施例中,當軟片通過中央 掃描開口 3 7 0時,在該軟片待掃描部分之縱長及橫向方 向上皆加以拉張。利用光源2 1 6及2 1 8便可經由該開 口 3 7 0來供應射線。針對每一像素,利用感應器1 1 6 F及1 1 6 B便可以偵測到由軟片正面及背面反射之射線 。穿透軟片之射線亦可以被偵測出來。(該光源2 1 6及 2 1 8係可以在不同時間發射,以使該感應器1 1 6 F及 1 1 6 B來區分反射及穿透的射線)。因此,針對該影像 之每一像素便可以得到背面、正面及穿透資料,而此一資 料係可用以衍生出針對該影像之R、G及B訊號。針對每 一影像,利用不同的掃描模組3 0 2、3 0 4、3 0 6及 3 0 8,便可以在不同的軟片顯影時間中得到多組背面、 正面及穿透資料。針對每一影像之多組資料便可以組合成 一強化影像,且包括由各個不同的軟片顯影時間所得到之 形狀特徵。 做爲打開活板門4 0 6之另一種變化方式,且如圖 1 1之實施例所示,其可以提供一垂片3 3 4,其係由一 種可撓性及具有彈性之材料所製成,諸如塑膠材料,其係 可以銜接在邊緣導引件3 2 8之相鄰片體上之凹口或表面 3 3 6。由扭曲或卡住之軟片2 2 0所產生之壓力係可以 使垂片3 3 4由凹口 3 3 6上脫離,而造成活板門4 0 6 - 一 τ/18__— -----—·------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498692 A7 B7 五、發明說明(46) 打開,而使該軟片向下經由開口而露出。或者,利用一在 一軟片壓力達到一特定値量之後便可作用之鎖固機構 3 3 4來取代之,使得該活板門4 0 6不需要提供此一機 構,而使得其可以鬆散地靠接該軟片導引件3 2 8之後續 部分。由於鬆散地接觸,該活板門4 0 6便可以保持關閉 。然而,由於軟片卡住所造成之壓力將可以克服該靠接力 量’而使得該活板門4 0 6得以打開,且該軟片2 2 0將 可以開始經由開口 4 0 4而外露。再次地,這可以避免軟 片卡住或機器故障,且在各種不同的軟片驅動裝置之間亦 可容許存在有速度之差異。 就另一變化實施例而言,該活板門4 0 6係僅由可隱 匿或可移除之軟片導引件部分所構成,而非實際樞接的門 板所構成。此一可隱匿部分係在軟片移動路徑上提供鬆弛 區域,以提供當軟片經過該軟片導引件3 2 6時之軟片壓 力釋放或扭曲釋放,並且可以修正在用以將軟片移動經過 系統之軟片運送機構之間的偏差。 如上所述,除了提供軟片壓力釋放之外,使軟片經由 活板門4 0 6而向下外露出來亦可以在模組之間提供較長 的軟片移動路徑。可以瞭解的是,控制掃描模組之間之顯 影時間係可以藉由改變軟片在模組之間之長度,以及/或 軟片在模組之間移動之速度來達成。因此,依照此一特徵 ,藉由使軟片在模組之間向下外露,在掃描模組之間之軟 片移動路徑便可以增加。然而,系統3 0 0之整體水平長 度並不需要增加便可以增加該軟片移動路徑之長度,這係 --49--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) .—--------訂---------. 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498692 A7 ____Β7 五、發明說明(47) 因爲活板門4 Ο 6可以增加軟片移動路徑在垂直方向上之 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 長度。因此,系統3 0 0便可以保持小型化尺寸,同時在 控制由模組3 0 2、3 0 4、3 0 6及3 0 8之間所進行 之軟片顯影時間間隔上亦可具有彈性。 現請參照圖1 3,其中槪要顯示另一示例性數位軟片 處理系統3 0 0,其係可以在不同顯影時間針對同一影像 來獲得多個數位影像檔。該處理系統3 0 0係包括複數個 處理裝置302、304及306 ,其中一長條帶之照相 軟片媒體係經由該處理裝置而被成列地運送。 經由處理裝置302、304及30 6來運送軟片帶 8 0 8,係藉由一皮帶組件來達成,其中該皮帶組件在圖 式中係以標號8 1 0來標示,其將在下文中詳細說明。此 一皮帶組件8 1 0 —開始係將軟片帶8 0 8運送至一顯影 站8 1 2,而在該處,一顯影劑噴嘴8 1 4係將顯影劑沉 積在該含有影像1 0 4之軟片帶8 0 8的中央部分(參照 圖1 )。在施加顯影劑之後,該軟片帶8 0 8便被運送至 第一處理裝置302。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 如圖1 5所示,該第一處理裝置3 0 2係藉由正面光 源816a、816b及背面光源818a、818b之 電磁射線(諸如紅外線)來掃描該軟片帶8 0 8。由這些 光源8 1 2 a、8 1 2 b所射出之射線的一部分係由軟片 帶8 0 8所反射,且由感應器8 2 0所偵測。由這些光源 8 1 6 a、8 1 6 b所射出之射線的另一部分將會穿透軟 片帶8 0 8 ,且由感應器8 2 2所偵測。同樣地,由背面 __ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A7 B7 五、發明說明(48) 光源8 1 8 a、8 1 8 b所射出之射線的一部分係由軟片 帶8 0 8所反射,且由感應器8 2 2所偵測,而所射出之 射線的另一部分將會穿透軟片帶8 0 8,且由感應器 8 2 0所偵測。由光源8 1 6 a、8 1 6 b所射出之射線 係分別藉由波導8 1 7 a、8 1 7b而被導向軟片帶 808之部位824上。同樣地,由光源818a、 8 1 8 b所射出之射線係分別藉由波導8 1 9 a、 8 1 9 b而被導向軟片帶8 0 8之部位8 2 4上。若有需 要,光學元件,例如透鏡或濾波器8 2 6及8 2 8亦可用 以在射線由感應器8 2 0及8 2 2所接收之前先將該射線 加以聚合。這些射線源及感應器之組合係可以針對在軟片 帶8 0 8上之每一影像而產生正面頻道、背面頻道及穿透 頻道(正面穿透或背面穿透頻道)之影像檔,其方式相同 於先前針對圖2所說明之方式。詳細顯示在示例性實施例 中之射線源816a、816b、818、818b皆係 包括有紅外線L E D s、散熱片及風扇之組件,這些元件 皆係整合成單一裝置。圖示實施例中之處理裝置3 0 2、 3 0 4及3 0 6皆係掃描/映像站或模組,其在結構上彼 此相同’同可以分開或移除。因此,以下將僅針對處理裝 置3 0 2來詳加說明其元件,然而,可以瞭解的是,處理 裝置3 0 4及3 0 6亦皆具有相同配置之相同元件,且其 係在處理裝置3 0 2後面的顯影時間中以相同之方式來操 作。 在處理裝置3 0 2完成掃描程序及產生數位影像檔之 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) --------1------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A7 ___Β7 49 五、發明說明() 後,該軟片帶8 0 8便被運送至第二處理裝置3 0 4 (圖 13),且之後再被運送至處理裝置306,在該處,其 同樣地被掃描而針軟片帶8 0 8上之每一影像產生第二組 及第三組數位影像檔。如上所述,在處理裝置3 0 4及 3 0 6處之掃描係可以在處理裝置3 0 2掃描之後來進行 ,且該軟片帶808運送至各個處理裝置302、304 及3 0 6之時間係可加以控制,而使得每一處理裝置 3 0 2、3 0 4及3 0 6係可以在藉由施加顯影劑之後所 展開的顯影過程中的不同預定時間來掃描該軟片帶8 0 8 。因此,三個處理裝置302、304及306係可以在 顯影期間的三個不同階段來掃描該軟片帶8 0 8,以在捕 捉影像上可以得到最佳化的結果。舉例來說,處理裝置 3 0 2係可以當軟片其曝光至最大強度光線的部分已經最 佳化地被掃描的軟片顯影時間來掃描該軟片帶8 0 8,而 處理裝置3 0 6則係在具有最低光線強度(諸如暗影部分 )之影像部分被最佳化掃描時來掃描該影像,而處理裝置 3 0 4則係在影像其具有中間強度光線之部分被最佳化掃 描時來掃描該影像。接著,在不同顯影時間掃描所產生之 數位影像檔,便可以藉由適當的規則系統來產生一最終影 像,而不需要如同上述折衷地選擇習知軟片顯影的時間。 圖1 3 c係顯示另一實施例之架構,其係用以在施力口 顯影劑至軟片帶8 0 8而開始進行顯影之後的不同時間中 產生影像之多個數位影像檔。圖1 3 c之實施例係包括一 單一處理裝置3 0 1 ,該處理裝置3 0 1係一種具有相同 _____ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ---------訂-----I---線‘ 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498692 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 於上述圖13所示之掃描器302、304及306的結 構。相同於圖1 3之實施例,圖1 3 c之實施例係可以在 顯影的不同階段來掃描該軟片帶8 0 8 (亦即,在施加顯 影劑之後的不同預定時間)’並且將由這些掃描結果所產 生之數位影像檔加以組合,而由軟片帶8 0 8產生最佳化 的影像。圖1 3 c之實施例與圖1 3之實施例的不同處, 係在於該軟片帶8 0 8係可以重複循環通過該系統,且在 軟片帶8 0 8上之影像係可以藉由同一掃描器3 0 1而在 顯影過程中之不同階段來進行掃描。爲了以單一掃描器 3 0 1來達到此一功能,其係採用在圖1 3 c中所示之皮 帶組件8 1 1 ,其係用以使該軟片帶8 0 8重複通過該掃 描器3 0 1。該皮帶組件8 1 1係由一內部成對之皮帶 8 1 9 (在圖1 3 c中僅顯示該成對皮帶8 1 9最外側之 皮帶)所構成,其係可以繞著一對隔開之滾輪8 2 1 (在 圖1 3 c中僅顯示該對滾輪之其中一滾輪)而移動,以& 繞著對應隔開之滑輪組8 2 3、8 2 5與8 2 7 (動滑車侖 )(在圖1 3 c中每一滑輪組僅顯示最外側之滑輪)而移 動。一對外部皮帶8 2 9 (再次地,在圖1 3 c中僅顯$ 該成對皮帶8 2 9最外側之皮帶)係繞著滾輪8 3 1、 8 3 7及8 3 9而移動,且繞著隔開之滑輪組8 3 3、 835、827 (動滑輪)、825及823 (在圖 1 3 c中每一滑輪組僅顯示最外側之滑輪)而移動。 該軟片帶8 0 8 —開始係以進入/離開部位(整體以 標號8 5 1所標示)而進入至圖1 3 c之皮帶組件8 1 1 53------ ----------^------------訂- ---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A7 B7_____ 五、發明說明(51 ) 中,其中該軟片帶8 0 8係饋入至兩對轉向相反之滾輪 8 2 1及8 3 1的夾縫中。當軟片帶8 0 8饋入至滾輪 8 2 1及8 3 1之間時,其便夾置且被壓縮地由皮帶對 8 1 9及8 2 9的相對表面所銜接。該皮帶對8 1 9及 8 2 1接著便將該夾置且被補捉住之軟片帶8 0 8運送通 過一顯影劑噴嘴8 4 1 ,其中該噴嘴係供應顯影劑至該軟 片帶8 0 8的中央部位。之後,該軟片帶8 0 8便被運送 通過該掃描器3 0 1 (再次地,夾置在皮帶對8 1 9及 8 2 9之間,且中該皮帶對8 1 9及8 2 9係僅與軟片帶 8 0 8之側邊部分相接觸,而未碰觸到具有隱伏影像及顯 影劑之中央部分),其中該掃描器301係產生一第一數 位影像檔,其方式係相同於圖1 3中該軟片帶8 0 8第一 次通過掃描器3 0 1時所產生之數位影像檔。該夾置著軟 片帶8 0 8之皮帶對8 1 9及8 2 9接著便離開掃描器 3〇1 ,其中該皮帶對819及829以及軟片帶808 係由惰轉滑輪8 2 5導引至動滑輪8 2 7,且之後便經過 滾輪8 2 1及8 3 9而回到進入/離開部分8 5 1 ,而在 該處,皮帶對8 1 9及8 2 9便釋放其所夾置之軟片帶 8 0 8。皮帶對8 1 9及8 2 9便在此位置上分開,並且 藉由滾輪8 2 1及8 3 9而被導向相反之方向。皮帶對 829接著便繞著滑輪837、835及833而回到滾 輪831 ,且在該處,該皮帶對829再次地與皮帶對 8 1 9共同捕捉並夾置該軟片帶8 0 8。一旦該軟片帶 8 0 8被運送通過夾擠滾輪8 2 1及8 3 9且由皮帶對 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----------ί-----------訂---------線· (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) ^4 498692 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 8 1 9、8 2 1所釋放之後’其接著便視可動轉換導引件 8 5 3之位置而定’而再次循環通過該掃描器3 0 1或者 係被導引至一拉緊滾輪(圖上未顯示)。 該轉換導引件8 5 3係由一彎曲表面所構成,其係可 以繞著一樞轉點8 5 7而樞轉。該轉換導引件8 5 3係可 以在一第一位置(實線所示)以及一第二位置(虛線所示 )之間移動。在第一位置上,該轉換導引件8 5 3係用以 將該軟片帶8 0 8再循環回到皮帶對8 1 9與8 2 1之間 ,而使得該軟片帶8 0 8再次被運送至掃描器3 0 1。在 軟片帶8 0 8上之不同影像的影像檔便藉由該軟片帶 8 0 8每次通過該掃描器3 0 1而產生。之後,該數位影 像檔便組合在一起而產生一最佳化之影像,如先前針對圖 1 3所說明之方式。 在第二位置上,該轉換導引件8 5 3係將軟片帶 8 0 8導向收集捲軸(圖上未顯示)。該轉換導引件 8 5 3係可以手動地或自動地由第一循環位置移動至收集 捲軸之位置,以使該軟片帶8 0 8可以視需要掃描影像之 次數而循環通過該掃描器3 0 1。 習於此技者由以上之說明可以瞭解,在一軟片處理系 統中運送一軟片帶而不會影響軟片內含有待顯影之隱伏影 像之部分,係相當具有優點的,其中該影像通常係位在軟 片之中央部位。對於數位軟片顯影系統,諸如在圖1 3中 所示之系統3 0 0,運送軟片而不會妨礙或影響軟片中央 部分之處理,係特別地具有優點。除了需要供應顯影劑至 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) ----------.-----------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A7 B7 五、發明說明(53) 軟片之中央部分且避免干擾到軟片之中央部分以外,數位 處理亦需要有光線或射線可由軟片之正面及背面反射回來 ,以及穿透該軟片之光線。以一種不會碰觸到該軟片包含 有隱伏影像之部分的方式來運送軟片,係大大地有助於在 製造環境中掃描該影像,尤其當運送軟片通過多個處理裝 置時。 因此,依照本發明之一特徵,該皮帶組件8 1 0係可 以相當具有優點地運送該軟片,而不會在顯影期間妨礙或 干擾到軟片之中央部分。這係藉由第一及第二成對之隔開 皮帶僅接觸該軟片帶8 0 8之側邊部分而達成,其中該皮 帶係沿著一處理路徑而延伸通過該顯影站8 1 2以及每一 處理裝置302、304及306。在軟片帶808與皮 帶組件8 1 0之間的相對關係係淸楚地顯示在圖1 3 a中 ,其中第一組間隔皮帶8 3 0 (在圖中係由個別之皮帶 8 3 0 a及8 3 0 b所構成)係與軟片帶8 0 8之第一上 方表面的相對橫向側邊相接觸。第二對間隔皮帶8 3 2 ( 在圖中係由個別皮帶8 3 2 a及8 3 2 b所構成)係與軟 片帶8 0 8之第二或底部表面相接觸。在第一組之個別皮 帶8 3 0 a及8 3 0 b之間的間隔最好係設計成可變式間 隔,並且可以選擇性地配合欲處理之軟片帶8 0 8之寬度 。此一間隔之距離係可以調整,以配合不同類型及尺寸之 軟片。一旦對於第一組皮帶中之個別皮帶8 3 0 a及 8 3 0 b之間隔距離適當選定之後,便可以針對第二組中 之個別皮帶8 3 2 a及8 3 2 b之間的間隔距離來加以選 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) I-----*---^------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ^4 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A7 B7 五、發明說明(54) 定。第二組皮帶8 3 2 a及8 3 2 b之間隔通常係與第一 組皮帶8 3 0 a及8 3 0 b之間隔相同。藉由此一方式來 配置皮帶,第一組之其中一皮帶,例如,皮帶830b , 便可以與第二組之其中一皮帶,例如8 3 2 b,相配合, 以捕捉軟片帶8 0 8之其中一側邊。在每一組中之另一皮 帶,8 3 0 a及8 3 2 a ,亦同樣地相互配合,以捕捉該 軟片帶8 0 8之另一側邊。明顯地,沒有任何一個皮帶會 碰觸到軟片帶8 0 8其包含隱伏影像1 〇 4之中央部分。 如圖13及13a所示,兩對皮帶830a、 8 3 0 b及8 3 2 a、8 3 2 b係藉由一系列之滾輪或滑 輪而將其導引在處理路徑上。該皮帶8 3 〇 a、8 3 〇 b 及8 3 2 a、8 3 2b係可以由鋼或其他適當金屬所構成 ,且具有一聚亞胺酯導引帶黏附在皮帶其與滑輪相接觸之 表面上。該導引帶係陷入在滑輪之凹溝中,以確保該皮帶 係以直線路徑移動。該對下方皮帶8 3 2 a、8 3 2 b亦 可以在其與該軟片帶8 0 8交界之側邊上塗覆胺基甲酸酯 ,以增加磨擦力。該對下方皮帶8 3 2 a及8 3 2b係可 以藉由一單一驅動馬達來加以驅動,以一致性地移動該皮 帶832a、832b。上方皮帶830a及830b亦 可以磨擦式地銜接至夾置在該對上方皮帶8 3 0 a及 8 3 0 b與下方皮帶8 3 2 a及8 3 2 b之間之軟片帶 8〇8 ,且藉由相同於下方皮帶832a及832b之驅 動馬達來加以驅動之。或者,用於上方皮帶8 3 0 a及 8 3 0 b之其中一滑輪係可機械式地連接至下方皮帶 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) i -----*---·-----------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498692 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(55) 8 3 2 a及8 3 2 b之驅動器,以一體式地驅動該上方皮 帶830a及830b與下方皮帶832a及832b。 做爲一變化實施例,可以藉由在其中一對皮帶上設置小支 柱’且在另一對皮帶上設置對應形狀之開孔,而使該上方 及下方成對之皮帶可以相互連接在一起。不論採用何種將 第一及第二對皮帶相互連接在一起之技術,當上方皮帶 830a及830b與下方皮帶832a及832b—體 式移動且該皮帶係壓縮式地或者係磨擦式地與軟片帶 8 0 8相銜接時,該第一及第二組皮帶係可以共同配合而 捕捉該軟片帶8 0 8且將其沿著處理路徑加以運送而通過 該軟片處理系統3 0 0。 現請參照圖1 3及1 3 a ,由圖上可以看出,該軟片 帶8 0 8係被導入至處理系統3 0 0之入口部位,而介於 兩組轉向相反之無端皮帶8 3 0及8 3 2之間,其中該入 口部位係以標號8 4 0來加以標示。該皮帶組8 3 0係由 一對滑輪8 5 0而饋入至入口部位8 4 0,其中該對滑輪 850係包含滑輪850a及850b (參照圖13a) ,而皮帶組8 3 2則係由一對滑輪8 5 2饋入至該入口部 位8 4 0,其中該對滑輪8 5 2係包含滑輪8 5 2 a及 852b。該皮帶組830及832係共同縮合於入口部 位8 4 0,以與該軟片帶8 0 8之相對表面相接觸,以捕 捉住該軟片帶8 0 8,接著該軟片帶8 0 8係被夾置且磨 擦式地被捕捉在兩皮帶組8 3 0及8 3 2之間。結合在一 起之皮帶組8 3 0及8 3 2以及其所夾置之軟片帶8 0 8 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----1 1^---Γ.-----------訂---------線· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498692 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) A7 B7 五、發明說明() ,接著便由一對入口滑輪8 5 4 (圖中僅顯示一個)而導 引至顯影站8 1 2之施配滑輪8 5 6 (圖中僅顯示一個) ,而在該處,該顯影劑噴嘴8 1 4係施配顯影劑於軟片帶 8 0 8之中央部位。如前所述,該皮帶組8 3 0係與軟片 帶8 0 8之上表面相接觸,且係僅與該軟片帶8 0 8之橫 向側邊接觸,而使得其可以很容易靠近該包含隱伏影像 1 0 4之軟片帶8 0 8的中央部分。在施配顯影劑之後, 該皮帶組8 3 0與8 3 2便接連地將軟片影像運送至第一 處理裝置3 0 2、第二處理裝置3 0 4及第三處理裝置 3 0 6。如前所述,圖示實施例之處理裝置3 0 2、 3 0 4及3 0 6係掃描站,其係在不同的選定顯影時間掃 描該軟片帶808,而使得在不同掃描站302、304 及3 0 6中所產生的數位影像檔可以組合成一數位式影像 。爲了將該皮帶組8 3 0及8 3 2以及夾置之軟片帶 8 0 8由一處理裝置運送至另一個處理裝置,其係採用了 一組或更多組惰轉滑輪。舉例來說,在處理裝置3 0 2與 3 0 4之間係使用一對惰轉滑輪8 6 0 (圖中僅顯示一個 )。當皮帶組8 3 0、8 3 2以及被捕捉在皮帶組之間之 軟片帶8 0 8係垂直地運送一段預定距離時,爲了使該軟 片帶8 0 8當其行經該處理裝置3 0 4及3 0 6之間時可 以具有預定的顯影時間,因此在處理裝置3 0 4及3 0 6 之間係顯示有三個惰轉滑輪組8 6 2、8 6 4及8 6 6, 藉此便不會在裝置之間存在過大的空間,以及不必要地增 加各個處理裝置所佔據之空間。 ---I ----.-----------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公髮) 498692 A7 ___B7__ 五、發明說明() 藉由以皮帶僅捕捉住該軟片帶8 0 8之單一側邊,亦 可以達到捕捉該軟片帶8 0 8之側邊而不會在顯影期間妨 礙或干擾該軟片之中央部位的目的,如圖1 3 b所示。如 圖1 3 b所示,當僅捕捉該軟片帶8 0 8之單一側邊時, 其係可以提供一可動或固定之支撐件,以連續地支撐該軟 片帶8 0 8其相對於被捕捉邊之側邊。或者,如圖1 3 b 所示,該軟片帶8 0 8其相對於被捕捉邊之側邊係可以懸 空的。 當軟片由圖1 3所示之三個處理裝置之最後一個離開 時,其係經過一對離開滑輪8 6 8而到達一離開部位 8 7 0,在該處,該皮帶組8 3 0及8 3 2係被導引於不 同的方向,以釋放該夾置之軟片帶8 0 8。該軟片帶 808接著便捲繞在一收集捲軸上(圖上未顯示)。該皮 帶組8 3 0接著便繞著一對惰轉滑輪8 7 4 a及8 7 4 b (圖上僅顯示一個)而移動,且藉由該對滑輪,皮帶組8 3 0係被導回至一對滑輪8 5 0而回到入口部位8 4 0。 該第二皮帶組8 3 2由離開部位8 7 0被導向一對驅動轉 輪876a及876b (在圖13中僅顯示一個,可參考 圖1 3 a ),其中該驅動轉輪係由一適當的驅動組件 8 8〇所驅動。 依照本發明之另一特徵,當軟片帶8 0 8行經該掃描 裝置3 0 2、3 0 4及3 0 6時,其位置與方向係必須加 以小心地控制。在許多目前使用之掃描器中的光學元件係 具有較窄的畫面深度,且需要該軟片帶具有較精確的定位 4Θ--- ------—*------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 498692 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(58) 及定向,以確保高品質及可重製之掃描。本發明係藉由使 用可轉動控制表面來小心地控制該軟片帶其欲掃描之部分 的位置及方向。詳言之’如圖1 5所示,皮帶組8 3 0及 8 3 2以及所夾置之軟片帶8 0 8係被導引經過該掃描器 之影像部位8 2 4,其中該影像部位8 2 4便係掃描該軟 片帶8 0 8之位置。當在此位置8 2 4進行掃描時,皮帶 組8 2 0、8 3 0以及軟片帶8 0 8係前抵於一對並排配 置之、浪輪9 1 0及9 1 2的外部表面(參照圖1 4 ),其 中該表面係可以相對於一固定軸桿9 1 4之中心軸而轉動 。在圖1 3所示之系統中,此一前抵動作係藉由將惰轉滾 輪定位在控制表面9 4 0之最下方延伸部的上方,並保持 該皮帶組8 3 0及8 3 2呈現拉緊之狀態而達成。在圖 1 3及圖1 5之實施例中,該滾輪9 1 0及9 1 2係藉由 其與皮帶組8 3 0形成磨擦式銜接而致動,而與該皮帶組 8 3 0及8 3 2以定時之關係一起移動。 該滾輪9 1 0及9 1 2係具有相同之尺寸及直徑,在 示例性實施例中係四英吋直徑之滾輪,且每一滾輪係具有 一彎曲或弓形之外部表面。由於其相等尺寸以及弓形之形 狀,兩滾輪9 1 2及9 1 4之外側表面便在大致垂直於表 面之曲率的方向上形成一影像平面。該軟片帶8 0 8將順 著該皮帶環繞該滾輪,且顯影層將會向上凹曲至該控制表 面之內側。因此,當軟片帶8 0 8被運送至影像部位 8 2 4上方時,該控制表面9 4 0係可確保軟片帶8 0 8 在掃描過程中係同時保持精確定位以及平坦度(保持在影 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------I.-----------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁} 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498692 A7 __B7_OR V. Description of the invention () (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 2 2 8 The reflected rays 2 2 4 and the transmitted rays 2 3 0 that penetrate all layers of the film 2 2 〇 And 2 4 0. Although the light sources 2 16 and 2 1 8 can emit multi-color light (that is, light of multiple frequencies), in the digital film processing system 100 of this embodiment, the light sources 2 1 6 and 2 1 8 are most Fortunately, it emits monochromatic light, especially infrared rays. The formed rays 2 2 2, 2 2 4, 2, 4 0, and 2 3 0 are referred to herein as front, back, front penetrating, and back penetrating rays, respectively, and they will be described further below. In FIG. 2 ', during the development, different color layers can be seen in the developing film 220, that is, the red layer 242, the green layer 244, and the blue layer 246. In detail, a blank film base 232 has three layers 242, 244, and 246, which can sense red, green, and blue light, respectively. These layers are not actually these colors; instead, they just sense these colors. In conventional color film development, the blue sensing layer 2 4 6 will gradually display a yellow pigment, while the green sensing layer 2 4 4 will display a magenta pigment, and the red sensing layer 2 4 2 It shows blue-green pigment. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs During the development of the film 20, the layers 242, 244 and 2 4 6 emit milky white light. The dark silver particles 2 3 4 (blue layer) developed in the upper layer 2 4 6 can be seen from the front side of the film by the rays 2 2 2, and due to the large number of developing photosensitive emulsions, it can also be seen from the back side. 2 2 8 saw slightly. Similarly, the particles 2 3 6 in the lower layer 2 4 2 (red light-sensitive layer) can be seen from the back surface 2 2 8 by the reflected rays 2 2 4, but they are less visible from the front surface 2 2 6. In the middle of this paper, the Chinese national standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) is applied. 2S --- 498692 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Layer 2 The particles in 2 4 (green photosensitive layer) can only be seen slightly from the front 2 2 6 or the back 2 2 8 by the reflected rays 2 2 2, 2 2 4. However, its system can be seen in other layers by penetrating rays 230 and 240. By sensing the rays reflected by the front 2 2 6 and the back 2 2 8 and the rays that penetrate the front 2 2 6 and the back 2 2 8 of the film, each pixel in the film 2 2 0 can obtain four The radon is measured, and the three primary colors, red, green, and blue, can be mathematically analyzed to make it closest to the original image. For example, it can be parsed by using a matrix conversion method, as disclosed in US Patent No. 5,515,100, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. The frontal signal is the ray 2 2 2 reflected by the frontal light source 2 1 6 on the front side of the film 2 2 0. The set of positive signals for an image is called a positive channel (F). The front channel is basically, but not completely, recording rays that are attenuated by the silver metal particles 2 3 4 in the uppermost layer 2 4 6 (ie, the blue recording layer). The front channel also records some rays that are attenuated by the silver metal particles 2 3 6, 2 3 8 in the red and green layers 2 4 2, 2 4 4. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The back signal records the rays 2 2 4 reflected by the back light source 2 1 8 on the front of the film 2 2 0. The set of back signals for an image is called the back channel (B). This back channel is basically, but not completely, recording the rays attenuated by the silver metal particles 2 3 6 in the lowermost layer 2 4 2 (ie, the red recording layer) from the light emitted by the light source 2 1 8. The back channel also records certain rays that are attenuated by the silver metal particles 2 3 4 and 2 3 8 in the blue and green layers 2 4 6 and 2 4 4. This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498692 A7 B7 07 V. Description of the invention () The front penetration signal is recorded by the back light on the back of the film 2 2 0 (Please read first Note on the back, please fill out this page again) Ray 2 3 0 emitted by source 2 1 8 and penetrating the developing film 2 2 0. The set of front penetration signals directed to an image is called the front penetration channel (T). Similarly, the back penetrating signal records the rays 2 4 0 emitted from the front light source 2 1 6 on the front side of the film 2 0 and penetrating the developing film 2 2 0. The set of back penetration signals for an image is called the back penetration channel (T). The front light source 2 1 6 can be charged at the first moment of recording the surface signal and the back penetration signal, while the back light source 2 1 8 can be charged at the instant when the back signal and the front penetration signal are separated. The two penetrating signals basically record the same image information, because they are all recorded due to the silver metal particles 234, 236, 238 in the three red, green and blue layers 242, 244, 246 of the film 2 2 0 The attenuated rays 230, 240. Therefore, one of the penetration channels is negligible. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and then using several image processing steps, the radiation from each channel (B, F, and T) can be converted into the radiation of each position on the film 2 2 0 Red, green and blue salamander. These steps are performed because the silver metal particles 2 3 4, 2 3 6, 2 3 8 formed during the developing step are not the specific spectra possessed in each of the film layers 242, 244, 246. When a conventional scanner is used to scan the film after it has been developed, 'these image processing steps are usually not performed because the dye formed by the film by conventional chemical color development is exclusive to each film layer, and the silver The metal particles 2 3 4, 2 3 6 and 2 3 8 cannot be scanned conventionally. However, 'as is the conventional scanner, once the initial red, green and blue paper sizes are applied to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) --- 498692 printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) A7 B7 oo 5. Description of the invention () When formed for each image, it will usually further process the red, green and blue 値 'to Enhance, manipulate, display and / or print the image. The image processing steps that can be used in this system are disclosed in U.S. Patent Application No. 08/99 9 421 and U.S. Patent No. 5 2 6 8 0 5, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. The exemplary embodiment of the digital film development system shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 is that a plurality of digital image files can be generated for the same frame image during different film development. Each image file has a back, front and Penetrating radon is obtained by using the above dual scanning method. It is quite advantageous to generate a plurality of double-scanned image files for the same picture in different development periods, which can make the shape of the picture image appearing in different picture periods can be recorded. During film development, the brightest part of the image (that is, the part of the film that is exposed to the strongest light) is the part of the film that is exposed to lower-intensity light (such as the shadow on the film corresponding to the original scene) Also developed first. Therefore, shadows or other parts of the film that are exposed to lower-intensity light require a longer development time to fully develop them, so that these parts can be displayed in more detail. However, longer development times can reduce details and other shapes in bright parts of the image. In the conventional film development, the development time must be selected, and the development time usually depends on the development period, and the development time of the brightest part, shadow part and other shapes of the image is selected in a compromise manner. . Scanning this developing film with a conventional film scanner will not show these detailed features that rely on time to develop. However, in the digital development method of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, it is not necessary to make this compromise _____ ^------------- -------- order ------ -线 " 41 ^-(Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) Printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs This paper is sized for the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498692 A7 B7_ 〇05. The invention was chosen (), because the digital image file of the same image will be generated in many development periods, and these multiple images can be combined to produce an enhanced image. In order to realize the double scanning of this image, as shown in FIG. 3, according to one feature of the present invention, it can use multiple separate scanning modules 3 02, 304, 306, and 308 to generate multiple images for the same image. Digital image files. Each module 3 0 2, 304, 306 and 308 in the digital processing system 3 0 0 includes a front light source 2 16, a rear light source 2 1 8, a front sensor 1 1 6F, a back sensor 1 1 6 B, which is operated in the manner described in Figures 1 and 2. In detail, please refer to FIG. 2 and FIG. 3. The front sensor 1 1 6 F detects the reflected rays 2 2 2 (produced by the front light source 2 1 6), and can also detect the penetrating rays 2 3 0 (produced by back light source 2 1 8). Similarly, the back sensor 2 1 6 B detects the reflected rays 2 2 4 (generated by the back light source 2 1 8) and the transmitted rays 240 (generated by the front light source 2 16). Referring now to FIG. 3, exemplary modules 300, 304, 306, and 308 are connected in series to form a system 300. In detail, each module 302, 304, 306, and 308 has a mounting member or panel 3 19, which can fix various components of the module fixedly mounted thereon. Each panel 3 1 9 has a film input surface 3 2 0 and a film output surface 3 2 2. In addition, each module 302, 304, 306, and 308 also has a film transport or guide assembly 3 3 3, which has a film input opening 53 for receiving the film. ------------ Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 498692 A7 B7__ λ Gate 5. Description of the invention () 3 3 0, and a film output opening 3 3 2 for removing the film. For example, each of the film transport units 3 3 3 can form a slit, and one edge of the film can be passed through the slit. As a result, the edges of the film can be carried between two slotted rails or edge guides. The film input opening 3 3 0 of the first module 3 202 receives the film after the film has been applied with a developer by an appropriate developer dispenser 3 10. The film output opening 3 3 2 of the first module 3 0 2 is connected to the film input opening 3 3 0 of the second module 3 0 4 and the film output opening 3 3 2 of the second module 3 0 4 It is connected to the film input opening 3 3 0 of the third module 3 06. Similarly, the film output opening 3 3 2 of the third module 306 is connected to the film input opening 3 3 0 of the fourth module 308. Therefore, the film is transported along the direction 3 2 4 from the first module 30 2 to the second module 3 04 to the third module 3 06 to the fourth module 3 0 8. Finally, the film 2 2 0 leaves the system 3 0 through the film output opening 3 3 2 of the fourth module 3 0 8. The film 2 2 0 is transported in a continuous long strip through the film conveying module 333 of the modules 3 2, 2, 304, 306, and 308, and is conveyed by a suitable film actuator, conveyor belt, etc. Exemplary embodiments of these devices will be described below. Due to the delay of the image delivery on the developing film 2 2 0 between the modules 3 0 2, 3 0 4, 3 06 and 3 0 8, each module is different during the developing of the film 2 2 0 Development time to scan and record a digital image file of a given image. For example, each image or picture on the film 2 2 0, such as the picture F located between the positions 3 1 2 and 3 1 4 can be developed by developing 33 ---- * ----- -— ^ ------------ Order · -------- Line i ^ w. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies to Chinese national standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm)-^ 498692 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Agent dispenser 3 1 0 to apply the developer. The transport actuator can then move the frame F through the film transport unit 3 3 3 of the first module 3 02, and at this time a first digital image file is generated, wherein the digital image file uses two Reflection signals (a back reflection signal and a front reflection signal) and a penetration signal (a back penetration signal or a front penetration signal), as previously described for dual scanning. The picture F is then transported to the second module 304, where a second digital image file is generated for the same image. Again, it is achieved by having two reflected signals and a penetrating signal. A double scan is used to achieve this. However, due to the delay in the predetermined time for transporting the picture F from the first module 3 02 to the second module 3 04, the picture F will come at a later time point during the image development of the picture F Scan it. As a result, during the development of the film 220, some features of the image that may appear may be captured in the first digital image file, but not appear in the second digital image file. And vice versa. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Other modules 30.6 and 3.08 can also be connected to the system 300 to provide additional digital image files during other development times of frame F. For example, after the second digital image file is generated for the frame F by the second module 3 0 4, the two reflected signals and A penetrating signal generates a third digital image file. Similarly, a fourth digital image file can also be generated in the longest development time by the fourth module 308, which is also generated by two reflection signals and a penetration signal. In this way, 'four digital image files of the same screen image can be used at four different development times. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). Staff of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The paper size printed by the consumer cooperative is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) 498692 A7 __B7____ 5. The invention description (32) is generated, for example, 25%, 50%, 7 5% and 100%. These four digital image files can then be combined with each other (ie, composited together) to form a composite digital representation of the image. This digital screen can be displayed on a video display connected to a computer, or printed by a printer (such as a laser or inkjet printer) connected to the computer, or stored as Files, and / or communication via a communication link. As shown in FIG. 3, in accordance with one feature of the present invention, each module 302, 304, 306, and 308 is separate from the system 300. Therefore, although the system 300 shown in the figure has four modules, the system can easily provide less than or more than four modules according to the needs of the user. For example, if the user only needs three modules to save costs, the fourth module 308 can be separated from the third module 306 and removed from the system. For the entire system 3 0 0 series, a shell can be provided, and each module 302, 304, 306, and 308 can be installed into the shell by mounting the panel 3 19 of each module, and each module can be made as needed. Groups move in or out of the system. Since the components of each module (for example, 2 1 6, 218, 116F, 116B, 333) need to be fixed directly or indirectly to the mounting panel 3 1 9, the entire module system can control the panel 3 19 for installation and processing; by doing this, the individual components of the module do not need to be processed separately, so the entire system 300 can be easily modified. As a modified embodiment of the mounting panel 3 1 9, it may also use other mounting members or housings to add each component of a single module ^-------, L --- j ---- -------- Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 498692 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Invention Description ( ) Fixed for easy handling. It can also be modified slightly when removing or adding one or more modules. For example, by removing module 3.0 from system 300, the system will only generate three digital image files, one generated by module 3 02 and one generated by module 3. 0 4 is generated, while the other is generated by module 3 06. Therefore, by eliminating the module 308, the cost of the entire system 300 will be reduced and the size will be smaller. If module 308 is removed, it can adjust the film development time that allows the remaining modules 3, 2, 3, 4, 3, and 6 to form digital image files, so that these modules can be used during the film development process. The best time to form a digital image file. Several methods can be used to adjust the development time of the film forming the digital image file, such as by adjusting the film transport buffer system, film speed, and / or the shape or interval of the other modules 3 0 2, 3 0 4 and 3 06. As an example of the flexible adjustment of the exemplary system 3 0 0, if one of the 3 0 2, 3 0 4, 3 0 6 and 3 0 8 modules needs to be repaired, the damaged module can be removed by Its mounting panel 3 19 is easily removed from the system 300. Preferably, all modules have approximately the same components, and each component has the same appearance design, so that the replacement of a damaged module will not hinder the operation of the system. For example, if module 3 06 needs to be repaired, module 3 06 can be removed and replaced with a substantially identical working module. Therefore, even when the module 306 is damaged, the system 300 can continue to operate after the module 306 is removed and sent for repair. Therefore, in the module 3 0 6 by the system 3 0 0 this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm) ----- ^ — Γ —-------- Order --------- Line (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) 498692 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Inventory description () Removed for repair The processing of 's Hai film 2 2 0 can also continue. In this way, the system 300 will not be unable to operate due to one or two of the modules 3 0 2, 3 0 4, 3 0 Θ and 3 0 8 failure. Therefore, according to one feature of the present invention, due to the removable and standardized design of the modules 3, 2, 3, 4, 3, and 3, the system 300 can be flexible and easy to upgrade or service. 4 and 5 are exemplary embodiments showing a detailed structure of the modular digital developing system of FIG. 3. In this embodiment, in addition to the irradiation sources 216 and 218, the sensor circuit boards 116F and 116B, the mounting panel 3 1 9 and the film transport / guide assembly 3 3 3, the four modules 302, 304 , 306, and 308 also include a pair of optical devices 1 10 6B and 106F. As mentioned before, the optical devices 1 1 06B and 1 06F are used to focus the rays emitted by the light sources 2 1 6 and 2 1 8 on the individual sensors 1 1 6 B and 1 1 6 F. As shown in Figures 4 and 5, a film mounting device 3 8 0 can also be provided to input the film into the system 300, and if necessary, the film and / or a leading strip can be cut. . The film loading and cutting actuator can be used to assist the cutting and loading of the film. The actuator system may include a motor, an electromagnetic controller, and other suitable devices. Also shown in FIG. 4 is a slot coater module 3 8 2 which includes a slot coater 3 1 0 for supplying a developer onto the film and includes a slot coater scraper. The roller 3 8 4 is used to clean the film before applying the developer. The components of the slot applicator module 3 8 2 are also fixed on a panel 3 19 for easy removal and handling. Same as scanning module 3 0 2, 3 0 4. This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) * -------- ---------- --Order --------- line (please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Printed on the paper by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. (210 X 297 mm) 498692 A7 B7____ 5. Description of the invention (35) 3 0 6 and 3 0 8 The slot coater module 3 8 2 also includes a film transport module 3 3 3 for transporting the film . In the exemplary system 3 0 0 shown in FIG. 4, the modules 3 8 2, 302, 304, 306, and 308 are fixed to the system by connecting the mounting panel 3 1 9 to a frame 3 0 1 In 300, the frame is preferably provided with a perforation to receive a pin or other connection mechanism to fix the mounting panel to the frame. The whole system 300 is located in the casing or the case 385, which provides a dark environment for film development, and if necessary, it can also integrate and move the system as a whole. According to another feature of the present invention, and as shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5, it is preferable that a film buffer assembly 3 2 9 is positioned at each of the modules 3 8 2, 3 0 2, 3 04, 306, and 308. Between the film transport components 333, compensation is made for the tension and / or slack of the films between the modules, and the films can be further developed between the modules. As shown in Figures 4 and 5, these film buffer components 3 2 9 can be used as additional film guides or guides, which are connected to the film transport components 3 3 3 of modules 302, 304, 306, and 308 in a line. And it is arranged between the guide rails of the components 3 3 3. The film buffer assembly 329 may include a pivotable flap door or platform on which the film can be moved. In detail, as shown in the exemplary embodiment of Fig. 6, the film buffer assembly 3 2 9 includes a buffer housing 4 02, which allows various components of the assembly to be fixed thereto. The housing 402 includes a trapezoidal door opening 404 through which the flexible sheet can be exposed. In order to cover this opening, a movable film platform or trapdoor 406 is provided, which is via a pivot or shaft 408 and--.-^ --------- --- Order --------- line (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) 498692 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Invention Description (36) Yes It is rotatably connected to the housing 402 so that it can be moved between a closed position and an open position, where the film trapdoor 4 0 6 covers the opening 4 0 4 and in the open position The trapdoor extends downward through the opening 4 0 4. When in this closed position, as shown in FIG. 6, the film moves between the trapdoor 4 06 and an upper guide 4 12, wherein the upper guide covers the trapdoor 406 And fixed above the casing 402. In order to rotate the trapdoor 4 0 6 between the open and closed positions about the central axis 4 0 8, a motor 4 1 4 or other actuator is provided. In the exemplary embodiment, the trap door Step motor. The motor 4 1 4 is mounted to a motor mounting plate 4 0 3, and the motor mounting plate 4 0 3 is fixed to the buffer case 4 2 via screws. The pulleys 4 1 6 and 4 1 8 and the pulley belt 4 1 7 are used to connect the motor 4 1 4 to the shaft 4 0 8. The pulley 4 1 8 is mounted on a shaft 4 08 with a bearing 4 1 9. Similarly, the pulley 4 1 6 is mounted on the motor 4 1 4. Rotating the motor 4 1 4 can move the pulley belt 4 1 7 connecting the pulleys 4 1 6 and 4 1 8 to cause the shaft 4 0 8 to move, which in turn makes the trap door 4 0 6 open and close. Turn between positions. Other variations are also possible to provide buffer openings between modules. For example, the trapdoor 406 can be slid between an open position and a closed position to expose the opening. A pair of film guide arms 4 10 are connected to the trapdoor 406 and are substantially perpendicular to the trapdoor 406, as shown in the exemplary embodiments of Figs. 6 and 7. When the trapdoor 4 06 is in the closed position shown in Figure 6 'and the ___- 3a ---- this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). I V ------------ Order --------- line · ^^ " · (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) 498692 Employees of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the consumer cooperative A7 B7_____ V. Description of the invention (37) When the film is moved between the trapdoor 4 06 and the upper guide 4 1 2, the film guide arm 4 1 0 extends upward. However, when the trapdoor 4 0 6 is moved downward by the force of the motor 4 1 4 at a selected time, the film guide arm 4 1 0 moves downward until it reaches the end of the arm 4 1 0 The bearing 4 1 1 abuts on the edge 4 2 2 of the housing 4 0 2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, the flexible sheet moves between the bearing 4 1 1 and the edge 4 2 2 and moves freely downward through the opening 4 04 because the trap door 4 0 6 is not Cover the opening. Figure 8a shows the closed position of these components, and the film 2 2 0 is located between the trapdoor 4 06 and the upper guide 4 1 2. Figure 8b shows the open position, where the trapdoor 406 is no longer covering the opening 404, and the film 202 is free to move down through the opening 4 0 4. However, in order to prevent the developing films 2 2 0 from joining together and possibly hindering the developing of the films, the film is located between the bearing 4 1 1 of the film guide arm 4 1 0 and the edge 4 2 2 of the opening 4 0 4 Move down. Therefore, the film can loosely pass through the opening 404, but it is controlled by the film guide arm 410. The slack portion of the film 2 220 can also be controlled, and is contained between the film groove arms 400L and 400R, as shown in Figure 5-7. Thereby, when the trap door 406 is in the closed position, the film system can pass through all parts of the film transport assembly 3 3 3. However, please refer to FIG. 4 and FIG. 5, the door panel in the buffer assembly 3 2 9 can be moved from a closed position to an open position so that the film can be directed toward the module 3 8 2, 302, 304, 306 or 308 Bottom and exposed. Therefore, if each module 382, 302, 304, 306 and this paper size are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ----------------- ----- Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 4 & Printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 498692 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (38 ) When the film drive actuator of 3 0 8 has a slight difference in the speed or movement of the film 2 2 0, which causes the film to jam or distort on the guide rail assembly, the film 2 2 0 can move downward Through the trap door 4 06 once positioned at the opening there, and the film was brought into the exposed channel 4 0 0, where the channel 4 0 0 is a pair of film guide members 4 0 L and 4 0 0 R formed. In this way, the system 300 will not cause a failure, and the film development process can be continued without interruption, thereby reducing maintenance shutdown time and related costs. Figures 9 and 10 show two exemplary embodiments of the film guiding / conveying module 3 3 3, which can be used in any one of the modules 3, 4 and 5 of the modular film developing system 3 8 2, 3 0 2, 3 0 4, 3 06 and 3 08. An upper carrying case 3 4 0 is included in each module 3 3 3 and is fixed to a lower film guide 3 2 7. The developing film is conveyed and guided between the upper transport case 3 4 0 and the lower film guide 3 2 7, such as by moving the film through a film formed between the case 3 4 0 and the lower film guide 3 2 7 slots. The lower film guide 3 2 7 includes an arcuate film scanning rod holder 325 having a central scanning opening 370. The film is moved through the scanning rod holder 3 2 5 during scanning, but is located below the transport housing 3 4 0. The radiation scans the developing film continuously in a row through the opening 370. Therefore, by guiding the film through the scanning rod holder 325, the longitudinal edge of the film can be formed into an arc shape at the portion where the radiation is applied. The arcuate scanning rod holder 3 2 5 may have an arc shape, which has a circular shape, and has a radius of about 1.00 to 2.0 inches. However, this paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) ----------------------- Order -------- -Line (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 498692 A7 ___B7 _ V. Description of the invention (3 <?) Moreover, it can also adopt other bow shapes with a fixed or variable radius. Since the film is flexible, like a photographic film, when it moves through the arched scanning rod holder 3 2 5, it has an arcuate shape. By positioning the film in a curved or arcuate manner, it can precisely control the position of the upper surface of the film. This is important to provide good scanning results when digital films are developed, which makes scanning equipment (for example, A light source and / or sensor) can be accurately positioned at a depth position where the film is intended to be located. The tension on the surface of an arched or curved piece of film may cause the film to warp, bend, or distort or take on an uncontrollable shape, which may affect the rays that are sensed by the sensor, and cause Accurate digital image data. In detail, stretching the film on an arcuate surface reduces the risk that the film will warp upward from the surface or present an uncontrollable shape, thus making the scanning device unable to align the image on the film. Conversely, positioning the film on a flat surface is not good because the film can easily warp upward from the surface. FIG. 11 shows an exemplary arcuate shape of the film 220 when it is scanned by the light sources 2 1 6 and 2 1 8 and the sensors 1 1 6 F and 1 1 6 B. Between positions A and B, the film 2 2 0 assumes an approximately arcuate shape. The tension on the film 2 2 0 is provided by the wheels 3 6 0A and 3 6 0 B, or other transport elements such as sprocket wheels or rollers, which engage the film and drive it through the scanning rod holder 3 2 5. The radiation is supplied to the film by the light sources 2 1 6 and 2 1 8 through the scanning opening 3 7 0. In order to provide this force, the wheel 360B is driven to rotate slightly faster than the wheel 360A, which will be described in detail below. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 χ 297 mm) --------- I ------------ Order -------- -Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 42- 498692 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (4C)) Place the film 2 2 0 in a bow shape during scanning Other designs of the shape can also be used. For example, Fig. 12 shows an example using a bow member 3 2 3 ', wherein the film 2 2 0 is transferred on the bow member 3 2 3. Please refer to the exemplary embodiment of FIGS. 9 and 10 again. The film transport assembly 3 3 3 includes a driving mechanism and a connecting rod to force the film to pass through the arcuate scanning rod holder 3 2 5. More specifically, a motor 350 or other suitable driving mechanism or actuator is used to supply driving force to transfer the transport between the transport housing 3 4 0 and the lower film guide 3 2 7 Film. The motor 350 can be constituted by a step motor, which can also be called a step motor. This motor converts electrical impulses into discrete mechanical movements of a shaft or spindle. The speed of shaft rotation is directly related to the frequency of input pulses, and the length of rotation is related to the number of input pulses supplied. One of the advantages of using a step motor is that it can be precisely controlled without the need for a closed loop controller or expensive sensing and feedback devices connected to it. Since each pulse supplied will cause a known incremental step in rotation, the position of the motor can be known by continuously tracking the number of input pulses supplied to the motor. A cable 3 5 1 can be used to supply electronic control signals to the motor 3 50. This control signal can be controlled by a stylized microprocessor or controller, which is used to control the movement of the film through the component 3 3 3. The motion of scanning the film by the light source and the pixels generated by the sensor data. For example, the computer 120 of FIG. 1 can be used to control these operations and control the action of transmitting a control signal to the motor 3 50 via the cable 3 51. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ---------. ------------ Order --------- line (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 4 ^ Printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 498692 A7 B7__ 5. Description of the invention (41) In order to transmit the rotary motion of the motor 350 to the film driving wheel 36, any appropriate connection or link member is provided. In the exemplary embodiment of Figs. 9 and 10, the 'motor 3 50' drives a shaft 3 5 2 which has a linkage gear 3 5 4 connected to the shaft. The linked gear 3 5 4 is connected to a pair of gears 3 5 8 and 3 5 6 which are connected to the shafts 3 6 2 and 3 6 4 respectively. A pair of film driven wheels 3 6 0 are connected to each of the shafts 3 6 2 and 3 6 4. The partition 3 6 1 and other suitable connecting members are used to configure the runner 3 6 0 along the shafts 3 6 2 and 3 6 4. The wheel 3 6 0 series may include a friction wheel or a pinch roller, wherein the bottom 3 6 6 of each wheel 3 6 is in contact with the upper surface near the edge of the film, and the film is held on the wheel 3 6 Between 0 and a surface 3 6 8 so as to force the film into the film guide 3 3 3 below the film transport assembly 3 3 3 shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 and the transport case 3 4 0 . In the embodiment of FIG. 9, the surface 3 6 8 is located on four rollers 3 6 7. These rollers 3 6 7 can expand outward toward the side edges 3 6 9 of the lower film guide 3 2 7. By expanding the rollers 3 6 7 outwards, the film can be stretched in the transverse direction 3 8 1 of the film during scanning, thereby preventing the film from being distorted or showing an uncontrollable shape, providing optimization. Scan results. It is also shown in the exemplary embodiments of Figs. 9 and 10 that, when the film is scanned by the light source, it is preferable that the film is stretched in the longitudinal direction 3 8 3. In detail, the sizes of the gears 3 5 6 and 3 5 8 are designed so that the rotation speed of the shaft 3 6 2 is slightly smaller than that of the shaft 3 6 4. Preferably, the difference between the speeds of the shafts 362 and 364 is at least 1.5 percentage points, and it is best that this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) I -------- ----------- Order --------- line (please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) 44 Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Consumer Cooperatives 498692 A7 _B7___ V. Description of the invention (42) is 5 to 12 percentages. This caused that when the film was scanned by the light source through the opening 3 70 in a row, the film between the shaft 3 62 and the shaft 3 64 was stretched. As mentioned above, and in accordance with another feature of the invention, the film tensioning system can be used to ensure that the film system is accurately positioned during the scanning process. The distortion or warping of the film during scanning can cause inaccurate image data. The tension on the film is preferably about 0.  5 ounces to 10 ounces, and preferably 4 ounces to 14 ounces, preferably 8 trays to 12 ounces, but any tension that does not tear the film can be applied. By providing gears 3 5 6 and 3 5 8 with different numbers of teeth, different speeds can be achieved. For example, the gear 3 5 6 series can have 168 teeth, while the gear 3 5 8 can have 180 teeth, thus providing a gear ratio of 168 to 180. In order to avoid tearing of the film caused by the difference in speed of the rotating shafts 3 6 2 and 3 6 4, a release clutch 3 7 1 or other friction device can be used to transfer the gear 3 5 8 to the gear 3 5 4 Come up and release. In detail, when the torque on the shaft 3 6 2 reaches a predetermined value due to the film being stretched by the shaft 3 6 4, the release clutch 3 7 1 will transfer the gear 3 5 8 to the interlocking gear 3 5 4 On release. The release clutch 3 7 1 may include any suitable release mechanism which releases a gear and / or reduces the torque when an excessive load moment 施加 is applied. For example, a suitable release clutch system may include devices known in the industry such as spring members, friction devices, sliding plates and / or ball elements. Therefore, when subjected to an excessive load moment, the release clutch 3 7 1 can cause the shaft 3 6 2 to slide relative to the shaft 3 5 2. Will cause the release clutch This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------------------- Order ---- ----- line " ^^ 1 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 4 & Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 498692 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (43) 3 7 1 The overload moment is a function of the tension of the film and the diameter of the driving wheel. As examples of variations of the release clutch 3 71 and the driving gear 3 5 6 and 3 5 8, other mechanisms that can maintain the tension on the film without tearing the film can be used. In addition to the central scanning opening 370, it also provides a reference area 390. The media transmitted through the reference area 390 can be scanned to provide a reference or target location, whereby the image scanned by the scan line 370 can be corrected, corrected, normalized or otherwise processed. O Although exemplary film transport / guide systems and components are shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, other systems and components may be used to drive and transport the film. For example, the film can be driven by a single shaft instead of a pair of shafts, and tension can be provided by preventing the film from moving forward. Furthermore, the runner 360 may include a sprocket, which is engaged with the opening in the edge of the film. As another modified embodiment, instead of being directly connected to the film, the runner 360 can also be connected to a conveyor belt or belt, which is then connected to the film or supports the film. Furthermore, a roller or a hinge can also be used to drive the film. Other suitable link mechanisms can also be used, such as belts, to transfer kinetic energy from the drive mechanism to the film. In addition, in addition to the components shown in Figures 9 and 10, other rollers, wheels, spindles, reels and related devices can also be used in the system shown in Figures 3, 4 and 5 'to complete the film Operations that are carried via the system. The paper size of the exemplary film development system will be explained with reference to Figures 4-10 below to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----- —--------- ---- Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 44 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 498692 A7 ___ B7 44 V. Description of Invention () operating. In detail, if necessary, the use of the motor 4 1 4 to open or close the trap door 4 0 6 can be achieved manually, or automatically after sensing a specific state, such as when sensing This is done automatically when the film is twisted or jammed, or when it is sensed that the film has reached a certain position. For example, once the film has reached the position of the first module 3 02, the film buffer assembly 3 2 9 between the slot coater module 3 8 2 and the first module 3 0 2 The trapdoor 4 06 can be opened by sending a control signal through the controller. (The position of the film can be detected by any suitable sensor, such as an infrared sensor). Then, the motor 3 500 in the slot applicator module 3 8 2 can be started to continuously drive the film, and the motor 3 50 in the first module 3 2 can be stopped. Therefore, the film will go down into the exposed channel 400 between the modules 382 and 302. Once the predetermined amount of the film has been exposed, or the motor of the module 3 8 2 has been driven for a period of time, the motor 3 50 of the first module 3 2 can be moved again, and the film can be further directed to the first Two scanning modules 304 to transmit. When the film reaches the predetermined positions of the second scanning module 304, the third scanning module 306, and the fourth scanning module 308 ', it also performs the film exposing procedure in the same manner. Therefore, there will be a slack portion 2 2 0 S in the soft film between the different modules 3 8 2, 3 0 2, 3 0 4, 3 0 6 and 3 0 8, as shown in FIG. 5. These 2 2 0 S systems will alleviate the distortion or jamming of the film, which is caused by different film driving speeds in different modules. Furthermore, 'these slack areas will cause the film to have additional development time between modules', and this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) --------- ------------- Order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Printed on paper by the Consumers' Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498692 A7 __B7 V. Description of the invention (45) There is no need to increase the size of the system 300 or reduce the speed of the digital film development process. These additional development times can be adjusted by changing the length of the film that can be exposed in the slack area. As described above, in this exemplary embodiment, when the film passes through the central scanning opening 370, the length and the lateral direction of the portion to be scanned of the film are stretched. The light sources 2 1 6 and 2 1 8 can be used to supply rays through the opening 3 7 0. For each pixel, the sensors 1 1 6 F and 1 1 6 B can detect the rays reflected from the front and back of the film. Rays that penetrate the film can also be detected. (The light sources 2 1 6 and 2 1 8 can emit at different times, so that the sensors 1 1 6 F and 1 1 6 B can distinguish between reflected and transmitted rays). Therefore, back, front, and penetration data can be obtained for each pixel of the image, and this data can be used to derive R, G, and B signals for the image. For each image, using different scanning modules 3 0 2, 3 0 4, 3 06, and 3 0 8 can obtain multiple sets of back, front, and penetration data at different film development times. For each image, multiple sets of data can be combined to form an enhanced image, which includes the shape features obtained from the different film development times. As another variation of opening the trap door 4 06, and as shown in the embodiment of FIG. 11, it can provide a flap 3 3 4 which is made of a flexible and elastic material Such as a plastic material, it can be engaged with the notch or surface 3 3 6 of the adjacent sheet body of the edge guide 3 2 8. The pressure generated by the twisted or stuck soft sheet 2 2 0 can cause the tab 3 3 4 to be detached from the notch 3 3 6 and cause the trapdoor 4 0 6-a τ / 18__------ — · ------------ Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 498692 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (46) Open, The film is exposed downward through the opening. Alternatively, it is replaced by a locking mechanism 3 3 4 which can be operated after a film pressure reaches a certain amount, so that the trapdoor 4 06 does not need to provide such a mechanism, so that it can be loosely supported. Connect the subsequent parts of the film guide 3 2 8. Due to loose contact, the trapdoor 4 06 can remain closed. However, the pressure caused by the stuck film will be able to overcome the abutment force ’, so that the trapdoor 4 06 can be opened, and the stuck film 2 2 0 will start to be exposed through the opening 4 0 4. Again, this can prevent film jams or machine malfunctions, and allow speed differences between the various film drive units. According to another modified embodiment, the trapdoor 406 is only composed of a concealable or removable film guide part, not a door panel which is actually pivoted. This concealable part provides a slack area on the film moving path to provide a film pressure release or twist release when the film passes the film guide 3 2 6 and can be modified in the film used to move the film through the system Deviations between shipping agencies. As mentioned above, in addition to providing the pressure release of the film, exposing the film downward through the trapdoor 4 06 can also provide a longer film moving path between the modules. It can be understood that controlling the development time between scanning modules can be achieved by changing the length of the film between the modules and / or the speed of the film moving between the modules. Therefore, according to this feature, by exposing the films downward between the modules, the film moving path between the scanning modules can be increased. However, the overall horizontal length of the system 300 does not need to be increased to increase the length of the film moving path. This is --49 --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). ---------- Order ---------.  Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives. The paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498692 A7 ____ Β7 V. Description of the invention (47) Because the trap door 4 〇 6 can increase the film movement The length of the path in the vertical direction (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). Therefore, the system 300 can maintain the miniaturized size, and at the same time, it can also be flexible in controlling the film development time interval performed by the modules 300, 320, 360, and 308. Referring now to FIG. 13, there is shown another exemplary digital film processing system 300, which can obtain multiple digital image files for the same image at different development times. The processing system 300 includes a plurality of processing devices 302, 304, and 306, and a long strip of photographic film media is transported in a row through the processing device. The conveyance of the film strips 8 0 8 through the processing devices 302, 304, and 30 6 is achieved by a belt assembly, wherein the belt assembly is indicated in the figure by the reference numeral 8 10, which will be described in detail below. This belt assembly 8 1 0 is initially transported to a developing station 8 1 2, and a developer nozzle 8 1 4 is used to deposit the developer on the image containing 104 The central part of the film strip 8 0 (see Figure 1). After the developer is applied, the film strip 808 is transported to the first processing device 302. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs as shown in Figure 15. The first processing device 3 02 scans the film by electromagnetic rays (such as infrared rays) from the front light sources 816a, 816b and the back light sources 818a, 818b. With 8 0 8. A part of the rays emitted by these light sources 8 1 2 a, 8 1 2 b is reflected by the film strip 8 0 8 and detected by the sensor 8 2 0. Another part of the rays emitted by these light sources 8 1 6 a, 8 1 6 b will pass through the film strip 8 0 8 and be detected by the sensor 8 2 2. Similarly, from the back __ This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 498692 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (48) Light source 8 1 8 a, 8 1 8 b A part of the emitted rays is reflected by the film strip 8 0 8 and detected by the sensor 8 2 2, and the other part of the emitted rays will penetrate the film strip 8 0 8 , And detected by the sensor 8 2 0. The rays emitted by the light sources 8 1 6 a and 8 1 6 b are guided to the portion 824 of the film strip 808 through the waveguides 8 1 a and 8 1 7b, respectively. Similarly, the rays emitted by the light sources 818a and 8 1 8 b are guided to the portion 8 2 4 of the film strip 8 0 8 through the waveguides 8 9 a and 8 1 9 b, respectively. If desired, optical elements, such as lenses or filters 8 2 6 and 8 2 8 can also be used to aggregate the radiation before it is received by the sensors 8 2 0 and 8 2 2. The combination of these ray sources and sensors can generate the image files of the front channel, the back channel and the penetration channel (front penetration or back penetration channel) for each image on the film strip 808 in the same way. The manner previously described with respect to FIG. 2. The ray sources 816a, 816b, 818, and 818b shown in detail in the exemplary embodiment are all components including infrared LEDs, heat sinks, and fans, all of which are integrated into a single device. The processing devices 3 0 2, 3 0 4 and 3 06 in the illustrated embodiment are all scanning / measuring stations or modules, which are identical in structure to each other and can be separated or removed. Therefore, the following will only describe the components of the processing device 3 2 in detail. However, it can be understood that the processing devices 3 0 4 and 3 6 also have the same components with the same configuration, and they are connected to the processing device 3 The operation is performed in the same manner in the development time after 0 2. Completing the scanning process and generating the digital image file on the processing device 3 0 2 is based on the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -------- 1 ------- ----- Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 498692 A7 ___ Β7 49 5. After the invention description The film strip 8 0 8 is transported to the second processing device 3 0 4 (FIG. 13), and is then transported to the processing device 306 where it is likewise scanned while the film strip 8 8 Each image generates a second group and a third group of digital image files. As described above, the scanning system at the processing devices 300 and 306 can be performed after the processing device 300 has scanned, and the film strip 808 is transported to the processing devices 302, 304, and 306 at the time system. It can be controlled so that each processing device 3 0 2, 3 0 4 and 3 06 can scan the film strip 8 0 8 at different predetermined times during the development process developed after the developer is applied. Therefore, the three processing devices 302, 304, and 306 can scan the film strip 808 at three different stages during development to obtain optimized results in capturing the image. For example, the processing device 3 0 2 can scan the film strip 8 0 8 when the portion of the film that has been exposed to the maximum intensity light has been scanned optimally, and the processing device 3 0 6 is The portion of the image with the lowest light intensity (such as a shadow portion) is scanned when the image is scanned optimally, and the processing device 3 0 4 scans the image when the portion of the image with the light of intermediate intensity is scanned optimally. . Then, the digital image files generated by scanning at different development times can be used to generate a final image by an appropriate rule system, without the need to compromise the conventional film development time as described above. Figure 13c shows the architecture of another embodiment, which is used to generate multiple digital image files of the image at different times after the developer is applied to the film strip 8 0 8 and development is started. The embodiment of Figure 1 3c includes a single processing device 3 0 1 which has the same _____ This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) --------- Order ----- I --- line 'The paper printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy applies the Chinese national standard ( CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498692 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () The structure of the scanners 302, 304 and 306 shown in Figure 13 above. Same as the embodiment of FIG. 13, the embodiment of FIG. 13 c can scan the film strip 8 0 8 (ie, at different predetermined times after the application of the developer) at different stages of development 'and will be scanned by these The resulting digital image files are combined and an optimized image is produced from the film strip 808. The difference between the embodiment of FIG. 13 c and the embodiment of FIG. 13 lies in that the film strip 808 can be repeatedly cycled through the system, and the images on the film strip 808 can be scanned by the same The scanner 301 scans at different stages in the development process. In order to achieve this function with a single scanner 3 0 1, it uses a belt assembly 8 1 1 shown in FIG. 13 c, which is used to make the film strip 8 0 8 repeatedly pass through the scanner 3 0 1. The belt assembly 8 1 1 is composed of an internal pair of belts 8 1 9 (only the outermost belt of the pair of belts 8 1 9 is shown in FIG. 13 c), which can be separated around a pair 8 2 1 (only one of the pair of rollers is shown in Figure 1 3 c), and & around the corresponding spaced-apart roller group 8 2 3, 8 2 5 and 8 2 7 (moving pulleys) ) (Only the outermost pulleys are shown in each pulley group in Figure 1 3c) and move. A pair of external belts 8 2 9 (again, only the outermost belt of the pair of belts 8 2 9 is shown in FIG. 1 c) is moved around the rollers 8 3 1, 8 3 7 and 8 3 9 And move around the spaced-apart pulley groups 8 3 3, 835, 827 (moving pulleys), 825 and 823 (each pulley group only shows the outermost pulleys in Figure 1 3c). The film strip 8 0 8 —Begins with the entry / exit site (indicated by the reference numeral 8 5 1) and enters the belt assembly 8 1 1 53 of FIG. 1 c ------ ------ ---- ^ ------------ Order- --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed 498692 A7 B7_____ 5. In the description of the invention (51), the film strip 8 0 8 is fed into the gap between two pairs of rollers 8 2 1 and 8 3 1 which are turned in opposite directions. When the film strip 8 0 8 is fed between the rollers 8 2 1 and 8 3 1, it is sandwiched and compressed by the opposing surfaces of the belt pairs 8 1 9 and 8 2 9. The belt pair 8 1 9 and 8 2 1 then transport the sandwiched and caught catch film 8 0 8 through a developer nozzle 8 4 1, wherein the nozzle supplies the developer to the film belt 8 0 The central part of 8. After that, the film strip 8 0 8 was transported through the scanner 3 0 1 (again, sandwiched between the belt pair 8 1 9 and 8 2 9 and the belt pair 8 1 9 and 8 2 9 It only touches the side part of the film strip 8 0 8 without touching the central part with the hidden image and the developer), where the scanner 301 generates a first digital image file in the same manner as the figure The film in 1 3 is a digital image file generated when 8 0 8 passes the scanner 3 1 for the first time. The belt pair 8 1 9 and 8 2 9 holding the film strip 8 8 then leave the scanner 3 01, wherein the belt pair 819 and 829 and the film strip 808 are guided to the idler pulley 8 2 5 Move the pulley 8 2 7 and then pass the rollers 8 2 1 and 8 3 9 to return to the entry / exit section 8 5 1, where the belt pair 8 1 9 and 8 2 9 release the clips they hold. With 8 0 8. The belt pairs 8 1 9 and 8 2 9 are separated in this position and guided in opposite directions by the rollers 8 2 1 and 8 3 9. The belt pair 829 then returns to the roller 831 around the pulleys 837, 835, and 833, and there, the belt pair 829 again captures and sandwiches the film strip 8 0 8 together with the belt pair 8 1 9. Once the film strip 8 0 8 is transported through the pinch rollers 8 2 1 and 8 3 9 and the paper size is applied to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) by the belt -------- --ί ----------- Order --------- line · (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) ^ 4 498692 Employees of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the consumer cooperative A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (8) After the release of 8 1 9, 8 2 1 'It will then depend on the position of the movable conversion guide 8 5 3' and cycle through the scanner 3 0 1 Or it is guided to a tensioning roller (not shown). The conversion guide 8 5 3 is formed by a curved surface, and is pivotable about a pivot point 8 5 7. The conversion guide 8 5 3 is movable between a first position (shown by a solid line) and a second position (shown by a dotted line). In the first position, the conversion guide 8 5 3 is used to recycle the film strip 8 0 8 back to between the belt pair 8 1 9 and 8 2 1 so that the film strip 8 0 8 is again Ship to scanner 3 0 1. The image files of different images on the film strip 808 are generated by the film strip 008 passing through the scanner 301 each time. The digital image files are then combined to produce an optimized image, as previously described with respect to FIG. 13. In the second position, the conversion guide 8 5 3 guides the film strip 8 0 8 to the collection reel (not shown in the figure). The conversion guide 8 5 3 can be manually or automatically moved from the first circulation position to the position of the collection reel, so that the film strip 8 8 can cycle through the scanner 3 0 as many times as necessary to scan the image. 1. Those skilled in the art can understand from the above description that transporting a film strip in a film processing system without affecting the portion of the film containing the hidden image to be developed is quite advantageous, and the image is usually located at The central part of the film. For digital film developing systems, such as the system 300 shown in Figure 13, transporting the film without impeding or affecting the processing of the central portion of the film is particularly advantageous. In addition to the need to supply developer to this paper size, China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 public love) ----------. ----------- Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 498692 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (53) The central part of the film and to avoid interference outside the central part of the film, digital processing also requires light or rays to be reflected back from the front and back of the film, and light that penetrates the film. Transporting the film in a way that does not touch the portion of the film that contains the hidden image greatly facilitates scanning the image in a manufacturing environment, especially when transporting the film through multiple processing devices. Therefore, according to a feature of the present invention, the belt assembly 810 can transport the film with considerable advantage without obstructing or disturbing the central portion of the film during development. This is achieved by the first and second paired spacer belts contacting only the side portions of the film strip 8 0 8, wherein the belt extends along the processing path through the developing station 8 1 2 and each A processing device 302, 304, and 306. The relative relationship between the film strip 808 and the belt assembly 8 1 0 is shown neatly in FIG. 13 a, where the first set of spacer belts 8 3 0 (in the figure are individual belts 8 3 0 a and 8 3 0 b) is in contact with the opposite lateral sides of the first upper surface of the film strip 8 0 8. A second pair of spacer belts 8 3 2 (consisting of individual belts 8 3 2 a and 8 3 2 b in the figure) are in contact with the second or bottom surface of the film belt 8 0 8. The interval between the individual belts 8 3 0 a and 8 3 0 b in the first group is preferably designed as a variable interval, and can be selectively matched to the width of the film belt 8 0 8 to be processed. The distance of this interval can be adjusted to match different types and sizes of films. Once the distance between the individual belts 8 3 0 a and 8 3 0 b in the first group of belts is appropriately selected, the distance between the individual belts 8 3 2 a and 8 3 2 b in the second group can be targeted Come to choose this paper size applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) I ----- * --- ^ ------------ Order ---- ----- line (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) ^ 4 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 498692 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (54). The interval between the second group of belts 8 3 2 a and 8 3 2 b is usually the same as the interval between the first group of belts 8 3 0 a and 8 3 0 b. By configuring the belt in this way, one of the belts of the first group, for example, the belt 830b, can be matched with one of the belts of the second group, for example, 8 3 2 b, to capture the film belt 8 0 8 One of them. The other belts in each group, 8 3 0 a and 8 3 2 a, also cooperate with each other to capture the other side of the film belt 8 0 8. Obviously, none of the belts will touch the film strip 8 0 which contains the central part of the hidden image 104. As shown in FIGS. 13 and 13a, two pairs of belts 830a, 8 3 0 b and 8 3 2 a, 8 3 2 b are guided on the processing path by a series of rollers or pulleys. The belts 830a, 830b and 832a, 832b can be made of steel or other suitable metal, and have a polyurethane guide belt attached to the belt, which is in contact with the pulley. On the surface. The guide belt is sunk in the groove of the pulley to ensure that the belt moves in a straight path. The pair of lower belts 8 3 2 a and 8 3 2 b may also be coated with urethane on the side of the interface between the pair of belts 8 3 2 and the film belt 8 0 8 to increase friction. The pair of lower belts 8 3 2a and 8 3 2b can be driven by a single drive motor to uniformly move the belts 832a, 832b. The upper belts 830a and 830b can also be frictionally connected to the soft film belt 808 sandwiched between the pair of upper belts 8 3 0 a and 8 3 0 b and the lower belts 8 3 2 a and 8 3 2 b, and It is driven by the same drive motor as the lower belts 832a and 832b. Alternatively, one of the pulleys for the upper belts 8 3 0 a and 8 3 0 b can be mechanically connected to the lower belt. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) i- --- * -------------- Order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 498692 Employees of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs The consumer cooperative prints A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (55) 8 3 2 a and 8 3 2 b drive to integrally drive the upper belts 830a and 830b and the lower belts 832a and 832b. As a modified embodiment, the upper and lower pairs of belts can be connected to each other by providing small pillars' on one pair of belts and openings of corresponding shapes on the other pair of belts. Regardless of the technology used to connect the first and second pair of belts to each other, when the upper belts 830a and 830b and the lower belts 832a and 832b are moved in bulk and the belt is compressed or frictional with the film belt 8 When the 08 is connected, the first and second sets of belts can cooperate to capture the film strip 8 0 8 and transport it along the processing path to pass the film processing system 3 0 0. Please refer to Figs. 13 and 13a. As can be seen from the figure, the film strip 8 0 8 is introduced to the entrance of the processing system 3 0 0, and the two endless belts 8 3 0 are turned in opposite directions. And 8 3 2, where the entrance is marked with the reference number 8 4 0. The belt set 8 3 0 is fed to the entrance part 8 4 0 by a pair of pulleys 8 5 0, wherein the pair of pulleys 850 includes pulleys 850a and 850b (see FIG. 13a), and the belt set 8 3 2 is composed of A pair of pulleys 8 5 2 is fed to the entrance portion 8 4 0, wherein the pair of pulleys 8 5 2 includes pulleys 8 5 2 a and 852 b. The belt sets 830 and 832 are condensed together at the entrance portion 8 40 to contact the opposite surface of the film strip 8 0 8 to capture the film strip 8 0 8, and then the film strip 8 0 8 is clamped. It is captured frictionally between the two belt sets 8 3 0 and 8 3 2. The combined belt set 8 3 0 and 8 3 2 and the flexible film belt 8 8 8 sandwiched by it. The paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ---- 1 1 ^ --- Γ. ----------- Order --------- line · (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) 498692 Printed paper size Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) A7 B7 5. Description of the invention (), and then guided to the developing station 8 by a pair of inlet pulleys 8 5 4 (only one is shown in the figure) The distribution pulley 8 of 5 2 (only one is shown in the figure), and at this point, the developer nozzle 8 1 4 distributes the developer to the central portion of the film belt 8 0 8. As mentioned earlier, the belt set 8 30 is in contact with the upper surface of the film strip 8 0 8 and is only in contact with the lateral sides of the film strip 8 0 8 so that it can be easily approached to the containing concealment The film of image 104 has a central portion of 80.8. After the developer is dispensed, the belt sets 8 3 0 and 8 3 2 successively transport the film images to the first processing device 30 2, the second processing device 3 04 and the third processing device 3 06. As described above, the processing devices 3, 2, 3, 4 and 3 06 of the illustrated embodiment are scanning stations, which scan the film strip 808 at different selected development times, so that the different scanning stations 302, 304 And the digital image file generated in 3 06 can be combined into a digital image. In order to transport the belt sets 8 30 and 8 32 and the sandwiched film strip 8 0 8 from one processing device to another processing device, one or more sets of idler pulleys are used. For example, a pair of idler pulleys 8 6 0 are used between the processing devices 3 0 2 and 3 0 4 (only one is shown in the figure). When the belt sets 8 3 0, 8 3 2 and the film strip 8 0 8 captured between the belt sets are transported vertically for a predetermined distance, in order to make the film strip 8 0 8 pass through the processing device 3 0 4 And 3 0 6 can have a predetermined development time, so three idler pulley sets 8 6 2, 8 6 4 and 8 6 6 are displayed between the processing devices 3 0 4 and 3 0 6. There will be too much space between the devices, and the space occupied by each processing device will be increased unnecessarily. --- I ----. ----------- Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy Staff Consumer Cooperatives This paper is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 issued) 498692 A7 ___B7__ 5. Description of the invention () By capturing only a single side of the film strip 8 0 8 with a belt, it is also possible to capture the film strip 8 0 8 side without obstructing or disturbing the purpose of the central part of the film during development, as shown in Figure 1 3b. As shown in FIG. 13b, when only a single side of the film strip 808 is captured, it can provide a movable or fixed support to continuously support the film strip 808 with respect to being captured. Side to side. Alternatively, as shown in Fig. 1 3b, the film strip 8 0 8 can be suspended with respect to the side edges thereof. When the film leaves from the last of the three processing devices shown in FIG. 13, it passes through a pair of exit pulleys 8 6 8 to a departure site 8 7 0, where the belt sets 8 3 0 and 8 The 3 2 series is guided in different directions to release the sandwiched film strip 8 0 8. The film strip 808 is then wound on a collection reel (not shown). The belt group 8 3 0 then moves around a pair of idler pulleys 8 7 4 a and 8 7 4 b (only one is shown in the figure), and the belt group 8 3 0 is guided back by the pair of pulleys Go to the pair of pulleys 8 5 0 and return to the entrance 8 4 0. The second belt set 8 3 2 is guided to a pair of driving wheels 876a and 876b from the exit portion 8 70 (only one is shown in FIG. 13, and reference may be made to FIG. 1 a). It is driven by the driving component 880. According to another feature of the present invention, the position and orientation of the film strip must be carefully controlled as it passes through the scanning device 3 0 2, 3 0 4 and 3 06. The optical elements in many currently used scanners have a narrower picture depth, and the film tape is required to have a more accurate positioning 4Θ --- ---------- * --------- --- Order --------- line (Please read the phonetic on the back? Matters before filling out this page) 498692 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Invention Description (58) and Orientation To ensure high quality and reproducible scans. The present invention carefully controls the position and orientation of the portion of the film strip to be scanned by using a rotatable control surface. In detail, as shown in FIG. 15, the belt sets 8 3 0 and 8 3 2 and the sandwiched film strip 8 0 8 are guided through the image part 8 2 4 of the scanner, where the image part 8 2 4 is to scan the position of the film strip 8 0 8. When scanning at this position 8 2 4, the belt sets 8 2 0, 8 3 0 and the film strip 8 0 8 are in front of a pair of side-by-side arranged outer surfaces of the wave wheels 9 1 0 and 9 1 2 (see Fig. 14), wherein the surface is rotatable relative to a central axis of a fixed shaft 9 1 4. In the system shown in FIG. 13, this forward abutment action is performed by positioning the idler roller above the lowermost extension of the control surface 9 40 and keeping the belt set 8 3 0 and 8 3 2 present. Achieved the state of tension. In the embodiment of FIGS. 13 and 15, the rollers 9 1 0 and 9 1 2 are actuated by forming frictional engagement with the belt group 8 3 0 and are connected to the belt groups 8 3 0 and 8 3 2 Move together in a timed relationship. The rollers 9 1 0 and 9 1 2 are of the same size and diameter, and in the exemplary embodiment are four inch diameter rollers, and each roller system has a curved or arcuate outer surface. Due to their equal size and arcuate shape, the outer surfaces of the two rollers 9 1 2 and 9 1 4 form an image plane in a direction approximately perpendicular to the curvature of the surface. The film strip 8 0 8 will surround the roller along the belt, and the developing layer will be concave upward to the inside of the control surface. Therefore, when the film strip 8 0 8 is transported above the image portion 8 2 4, the control surface 9 40 can ensure that the film strip 8 0 8 maintains precise positioning and flatness (keep on film paper) at the same time during scanning. Standards apply to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------ I. ----------- Order --------- (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page} Printed by the Employees and Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs This paper is suitable for China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498692 A7 __B7_

RQ 五、發明說明() 像平面上)。滾輪9 1 0係保持軸向靜止不動,亦即,其 係不會相對於固定軸桿9 1 4而軸向地移動。然而,若有 需要,該滾輪9 1 2係可以指標式地或可軸向地移動,以 達到調整滾輪9 1 0及9 1 2之間之間隔的目的,藉此以 配合各種不同尺寸之軟片。該滾輪9 1 0及9 1 2之軸向 間隔係相同於在皮帶組8 3 0中之個別皮帶之間所選定之 間隔。藉由此一間隔,便可以相當有利地避免在控制表面 與軟片帶8 0 8之中央部分之間產生接觸,且該軟片帶 8 0 8之中央部位亦可以輕易地加以掃描而不會受到運送 系統之干擾。 軟片帶8 0 8在影像部位8 2 4之掃描亦可以藉由在 固定軸桿9 1 4中之一狹縫9 1 5來進行,其中該狹縫係 與滾輪9 1 0及9 1 2之間的間隔相對齊。此一對齊的狹 縫9 1 5係可以提供一位在控制表面9 4 0上方之感應器 8 2 0之一視線。在此亦應說明的是,在軟片帶8 0 8正 面之射線源及波導8 1 7 a及8 1 7 b亦可以定位在介於 滾輪9 1 0及9 1 2之間之間隔中之軟片帶上方。 圖1 6及1 6 a係顯示本發明之控制表面特徵之另一 變化實施例。在此一實施例中,軟片帶8 0 8係插入至一 對轉向相反之滾輪之間的間隙中,亦即一對高磨擦力之驅 動滾輪6 0 0與一對備用滾輪6 0 2之間。在每一對滾輪 中之個別滾輪600a 、60〇b 、6〇2a及602b 係顯示在圖1 6 a中。該軟片帶8 0 8接著便被饋入通過 一由一對並排配置之滾輪6 0 4 (在圖中僅顯示其中一滾 42-- ---------.------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A7 ______B7 五、發明說明(6〇) 輪)所形成之控制表面9 4 0。一第二對轉向相反之滾輪 ’亦即一高磨擦力滾輪6 0 6與一備用滾輪6 0 8係定位 在由該滾輪6 0 0與6 0 2所構成之控制平坦表面之相對 側邊上,且該軟片帶8 0 8係被饋入至此第二對滾輪 6 0 6、6 0 8之間的夾縫中。每一驅動滾輪6 0 6及 6 0 8係可以被驅動而轉動得比驅動滾輪6 0 0還快。此 一速度上的不均衡係會使得該軟片帶8 0 8呈現拉緊之狀 態,而造成軟片被控制平坦表面9 4 0緊緊地拉住。然而 ,驅動滾輪6 0 6亦可以具有一釋放離合器,以防止在軟 片帶8 0 8上施加過大的張力。因此,驅動滾輪6 0 0之 速度便可用以控制該軟片帶8 0 8之速度,而驅動滾輪 6 0 6則可用以控制該軟片帶8 0 8通過控制表面之張力 。如同前述之控制表面,在圖1 6所示之控制平坦表面係 由兩個具有相同於軟片尺寸之間隔的滾輪所構成,使其僅 可與軟片帶8 0 8之橫向邊緣相接觸,而不會碰觸到該包 含隱伏影像之中央部分(於其上已經施配有顯影劑)。同 樣地,當前抵該控制表面9 4 0時,軟片帶8 0 8係被運 送至影像平面9 4 0中之平面方向上介於波導8 1 7、 8 1 7 b及8 1 9 a、8 1 9 b之間的掃描部位。 本發明控制表面特徵之另一修飾實施例係顯示在圖 1 7中,其係採用一對較小、具拉張性之高磨擦性皮帶 7 0 0,以將軟片帶8 0 8推抵該控制表面9 4 0。兩磨 擦皮帶7 0 0 (在圖1 7中僅顯示一個)係與軟片帶 8 0 8之相對兩側邊相接觸,並且將軟片帶8 0 8推擠至 --^ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----------------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A7 ____B7 五、發明說明(61 ) 適合掃描之位置及方向。該磨擦皮帶7 0 0係延伸在一對 滾輪7 0 2及7 0 4之間’其係位在控制表面9 4 0之相 對側邊。最好亦可供應驅動力至影像滾輪,且利用該對端 部滾輪7 0 2的7 0 4來做爲惰轉滑輪。 雖然軟片係可以被直接驅動通過上述之數位軟片顯影 系統,然而圖1 8係顯示依照本發明之另一特徵以驅動軟 片通過此一系統之另一種方法及系統。在此一實施例中, 軟片2 2 0及軟片2 2 Ο B係供應至一膠帶或皮帶5 2 0 。任何適當之接合裝置或物質皆可用以將軟片2 2 Ο A及 2 2 Ο B接合至膠帶,諸如黏膠。一旦軟片附接於膠帶之 後,該膠帶5 2 0便可以被直接驅動通過軟片顯影系統, 諸如利用鏈輪或滾輪。在膠帶5 2 0之邊緣上係可提供鏈 輪孔5 2 2,以利用鏈輪系統來驅動該膠帶。 如圖1 8所示之實例,膠帶5 2 0係由軟片帶 2 2 Ο A之側緣5 3 Ο A延伸而出,以及由軟片帶 2 2 Ο B之側緣5 3 Ο B延伸而出,藉此形成膠帶延伸部 A。這些延伸部A係可以藉由一靠近膠帶5 2 0之側緣 5 2 1及5 2 3之軟片運送機構來加以接觸及移動。舉例 來說,在延伸部A上之鏈輪孔5 2 2係可以藉由一鏈輪來 加以銜接,以直接運送該膠帶5 2 0,以及間接地運送該 黏合之軟片帶220A及220B。 膠帶5 2 0係可以由一塑膠、聚酯、聚乙烯醋酸、聚 氯乙烯、m y 1 a r、紙或其他適當材料製成之基部所構 成。一黏膠,諸如壓克力或橡膠樹脂’係可用以黏固該軟 -^64 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----------.------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 498692 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(62) 片帶2 2 Ο A及2 2 O B。最好,該膠帶5 2 0以及黏膠 係可使掃描射線穿透,以使其不會干擾掃描程序。舉例來 說’若使用紅外線來掃描該軟片帶2 2 0 A、2 2 0 B, 則膠帶5 2 0最好係可使該紅外線穿透。黏膠及/或膠帶 亦可包括一種或更多之顯影劑物質,以有助於使軟片上之 影像及/或靠近軟片邊緣之任何資料(諸如條碼)可以顯 影。 藉由使用此一膠帶5 2 0 ,該系統便可以輕易地配合 各種不同尺寸之軟片。舉例來說,軟片2 2 0 A可能包含 一種AP S軟片帶,而軟片2 2 0 B則可能包含一種3 5 mm之軟片帶。該膠帶5 2 0係具有足夠之寬度,以配合 各種不同的軟片寬度(亦即,W0>W2>W1)。因此 ,相同之軟片運送顯影系統便可用以掃描各種不同類型之 軟片,而不需要針對不同類型之軟片來提供不同的硬體系 統及元件。因此,不論係寬度(W 1及W 2 )或者係鏈輪 孔5 2 7之尺寸或間隔,在欲由數位軟片處理系統來加以 掃描之軟片2 2 0 A及2 2 0 B之間皆不需要具有一致性 〇 此外,使用該膠帶5 2 0係可以在膠帶5 2 0之不同 位置上配置對準標記5 2 4。這些標記5 2 4係可以由數 位軟片處理系統來解讀,以有助於解析及對準該數位影像 資料檔,並且確保在數位軟片顯影過程期間可以適當地對 準畫面。舉例來說,此一標記5 2 4係可以由紅外線照相 機、磁頭、掃描裝置或其他裝置來加以判讀,以藉此提供 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) ---------------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498692 A7 B7 五、發明說明(63) 回饋參考訊號,用以辨識不同畫面之位置、不同類型之軟 片帶、不同的顯影時間等等。再者,此一標記5 2 4係可 用以提供反饋至運送馬達’以控制軟片通過系統之運送速 率。此一反饋亦可以在軟片顯影過程之不同時間點來啓動 或致動該軟片影像掃描程序。此外’該標記5 2 4亦可以 在數位掃描過程中產生數位資料,以使由各個軟片層及/ 或由不同的軟片顯影時間所取得之各種不同數位影像可以 相對齊。該標記5 2 4係可以配置在每η個鏈輪孔5 2 2 之後,其係η係正整數。 圖1 9係顯示利用膠帶5 2 0以運送軟片2 2 0之其 他優點。在此一實施例中,膠帶5 2 0以及所黏合之軟片 2 2 0,係利用一組驅動轉輪5 2 6來加以驅動,其中該 轉輪係在靠近膠帶5 2 0其一側緣5 2 1之位置上打孔, 而另一組驅動轉輪5 2 8則係在靠近膠帶5 2 0其另一側 緣5 2 3之位置上打孔。顯影劑5 2 8係施配在軟片 2 2 0之上表面2 2 6,以使軟片當其由諸如在圖1至3 中所述之掃描或映像裝置所掃描時可以顯影。若該軟片 2 2 0之邊緣係直接由轉輪5 2 6及5 2 8所驅動時,則 顯影劑5 2 8便有可能在靠近軟片2 2 0之邊緣位置形成 滾邊,其中該滾邊係比顯影劑之其他部分還要厚。然而, 在圖1 9之實施例中,由於膠帶5 2 0係比顯影軟片 2 2 0還寬,因此顯影劑5 2 8便會散溢至軟片之邊緣 5 3 0。雖然在靠近邊緣5 3 0之位置仍有可能會形成滾 邊532,如圖19所示,然而若這些滾邊532係位在 ---------^-----------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A7 ______B7_ 五、發明說明(64) 邊緣5 3 0外側時,其將不會干擾掃描操作。 再者,若該軟片2 2 0係直接由驅動裝置所驅動時, 諸如一驅動轉輪5 2 8或鏈輪,則顯影劑5 2 8將無法完 全地覆蓋在欲掃描之畫面,因而使得畫面及隱伏在其上之 影像的顯影無法具有一致性。再者,在此一直接軟片驅動 設計中,顯影劑5 2 8係會與驅動裝置接觸並且相互干擾 ,因此需要經常地維修及淸潔。再者,若軟片係由驅動裝 置所直接驅動時,則被記錄在靠近軟片邊緣5 3 0上之資 訊,諸如軟片類型及縱橫比資訊,便無法被讀取。某些軟 片類型,諸如A P S軟片,係包括一靠近軟片邊緣5 3 0 之磁性及/或光學條帶,其包括有針對每一畫面之資訊, 若該軟片2 2 0係由兩邊緣被直接驅動時,且此一條帶將 無法被讀取。此外,某些軟片製造商在軟片邊緣上係提供 有條碼,其係提供與軟片感光劑成份有關之資訊,若該軟 片2 2 0係由兩邊緣被直接驅動時,則該條碼便無法被讀 取。再者,直接運送軟片通過一數位軟片處理系統係會造 成在軟片上之隱伏影像被遮蔽。 然而,如圖1 9所示,當軟片2 2 0藉由使用膠帶 5 2 0而被間接地驅動時,該顯影劑5 2 8便可以一大致 均勻的層體而完全地覆蓋在軟片之整個寬度上。再者,該 顯影劑5 2 8與驅動轉輪5 2 6及5 2 8相接觸之風險便 可降低,否則顯影劑藉由穿過鏈輪孔而與軟片運送及掃描 設備相接觸時,將會干擾到操作及/或需要更經常地進行 維修/淸潔。此外,膠帶5 2 0係具有足夠的寬度,以使 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) -----** —·---------—訂---------^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A7 B7 五、發明說明(65) 得靠近欲由驅動轉輪5 2 6及5 2 8所接觸或驅動的部位 係具有較大的面積,因此可以提供膠帶最佳的固持性,並 且降低轉輪滑脫或其他運送上發生錯誤的機會。再者,利 用諸如圖1 9所示之膠帶黏合件5 2 0係可使軟片顯影劑 能將配置在軟片2 2 0之側緣5 3 0上的條碼加以顯影, 而使得條碼可以被讀取而供數位軟片處理系統來利用。此 外,利用膠帶5 2 0係可使磁性、光學及/或其他記錄在 軟片2 2 0之側緣5 3 0上之資料,在數位軟片顯影過程 中可以被讀取及利用。舉例來說,由A P S軟片上讀取之 縱橫比資料係可用以調整由數位資料所形成之影像的尺寸 。再者,該膠帶5 2 0係可以防止軟片2 2 0上之隱伏影 像的邊緣部分由軟片運送裝置所遮蔽,因爲裝置係與膠帶 5 2 0接觸,而非直接與軟片相接觸。 圖2 0及2 1係顯示將膠帶施加至軟片以將其運送通 過一數位軟片處理系統之可行方式。在圖2 0之實施例中 ,一黏膠5 3 6係可以施加在膠帶5 2 0之表面5 4 0上 。軟片2 2 0之底部表面2 2 8接著便可以黏合至膠帶 5 2 0之表面5 4 0。一旦軟片2 2 0及膠帶5 2 0黏合 在一起之後,膠帶5 2 0之部分A將會由軟片2 2 0之邊 緣5 3 0延伸而出。膠帶5 2 0之部分A便可以由一驅動 裝置所銜接,而運送該膠帶/軟片組合體。 在圖2 1的實施例中,膠帶之兩個部分,5 2 Ο A及 5 2 Ο B,係可以黏附在靠近軟片2 2 0之相對側緣 530。膠帶520A、520B之黏膠部位B係黏合至 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----- —'------------訂—------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498692 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) A7 _____B7_____ 五、發明說明(66) 軟片220,而該膠帶520A、520B之延伸部分A 則係由軟片2 2 0之側緣5 3 0延伸而出。因此’延伸部 分A係由一驅動裝置所銜接,以運送該膠帶/軟片組合體 。再者,在圖2 1之示例性實施例中,最好膠帶之部分B 係不會覆蓋到軟片上任何影像或記錄有資訊之部位。因此 ,此一設計將可以降低整個膠帶5 2 0 A或5 2 0 B與在 掃描期間任何施加至軟片2 2 0之光線所干擾之風險。再 者,此一設計係使得膠帶5 2 0 A、5 2 0 B可以相對於 掃描射線而爲不可穿透性或可穿透性膠帶。 亦可以具有其他的變化方式。舉例來說,該膠帶之邊 緣係可以係反折且黏合之雙重邊緣,以防止黏膠外露至軟 片或硬體設備。此一設計係顯示在圖2 2中。如圖所示, 該膠帶片5 2 0 A之邊緣5 2 1係加以反折而與軟片 2 2 0之第一邊緣5 3 0A靠合在一起,且膠帶片 5 2 0 B之邊緣5 2 3亦係加以反折而與軟片2 2 0之第 二邊緣5 3 0 B靠合在一起。因此,黏膠便可以位在膠帶 片520A及520B之上表面535,而不會與其他裝 備及表面相接觸。 亦可以實施其他的變化方式。黏膠亦可以僅存在於軟 片2 2 0與膠帶5 2 0之間,以藉此防止其與外露黏膠相 干擾。再者,就另一種變化方式而言,膠帶亦可以施加至 該軟片2 2 0之單一邊緣5 3 0上,而不是同時施加在軟 片之兩邊緣。接著,便可以調整該膠帶之寬度,使得軟片 2 2 0可以大約係較大尺寸之軟片的寬度,且因此可以使 49- ------- ^—-------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498692 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(67) 用在針對較大尺寸軟片所設計之運送系統中。在此一設計 中,軟片2 2 0之一邊緣及膠帶5 2 0之一邊緣係藉由軟 片運送系統來加以運送。 圖2 3係顯示一數位軟片處理系統3 0 5之一實施例 ,其係採用在圖1 8 - 2 2中所示之膠帶運送設計。在此 一系統3 0 5中係包括一膠帶供應施配器5 6 8,以及一 軟片/膠帶結合器5 7 2。該軟片/膠帶結合器5 7 2係 將膠帶黏合至軟片,諸如先前針對圖1 8 - 2 2所述之方 式。在此一實施例中,數個滾輪4 6 6係用以接觸及導引 該膠帶側緣。爲了驅動該膠帶及所結合之軟片通過該系統 ,一絞盤驅動器4 6 4係位在靠近系統3 0 5之前緣側 4 7 6。該絞盤驅動器4 6 4係可包括一馬達或其他致動 器,其係用以提供旋轉運動,以及包括一對夾擠滾輪 4 6 5。該夾擠滾輪4 6 5係可以藉由致動器之作用力而 轉動,且該膠帶係被夾擠在滾輪4 6 5之間,以與該膠帶 邊緣相接觸,並且使膠帶通過該系統3 0 5,其接著再將 所黏合之軟片壓入通過該系統。靠近系統3 0 5之相對兩 側的部位係具有一拉緊器4 6 2,其係包括一對夾擠滾輪 4 6 7。膠帶係在滾輪4 6 7之間移動,其係接觸或夾擠 該膠帶邊緣,並且提供其移動上之阻抗。由拉緊器4 6 2 所提供之阻抗値係可以調整的,諸如藉由調整施加在滾輪 4 6 7之間的接觸力而達成。如上所述,最好該滾輪 46 5、466及467係僅與膠帶直接地接觸。然而, 如上所述,亦可以嘗試使這些滾輪之一側緣與膠帶相接觸 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) i ------ —*------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A7 ——_B7__ 五、發明說明(68) ,且以另一側緣與所黏合之軟片相接觸。 當軟片與所黏合之軟片係被運送通過該系統,且該第 一軟片畫面已經到達該施配器3 1 0時,顯影劑便可以經 由該施配器3 1 0而施加在畫面上,其中該施配器係可包 含一狹縫塗覆器(s C )。當軟片畫面沿著圖示之路徑而 移動時,該軟片畫面接著便可以開始顯影。一第一映像模 組5 0 2係可掃描該軟片畫面,並且在一第一顯影時間產 生一第一數位影像檔。當軟片2 2 0持續行經該系統 3 0 3時’其便持繪地顯影’直到其到達一'第二映像模組 5 0 4,且在該處,於第二軟片顯影時間產生一第二數位 影像檔。該軟片係持續顯影’直到其到達第二映像模組 5 0 6 ’其係在第二軟片顯影時間產生一第二映像檔。此 三個數位影像檔接著便疊合在一起而產生一個影像資料檔 ,其包括在所有三個顯影時間中存在於畫面上之影像特徵 。因此,在由最後一個模組5 0 6加以掃描之前,該軟片 之全部顯影時間便係軟片由位置A (由施配器3 1 〇施加 顯影劑)移動至位置B (藉由掃描軟片而產生最後一個數 位影像檔)之時間。一收集捲軸5 7 4便可以在流程的最 後來收集該膠帶及所黏合之軟片。 上述示例性數位軟片顯影系統係可以採用數種裝置、 材料以及方法,以將軟片帶導入至系統。舉例來說,依照 本發明之一特徵,且如圖2 4所示,一前導帶4 4 〇係在 疊接點4 4 2處串連至軟片帶2 2 0,其中該疊接點係藉 由將前導帶之末緣4 4 1黏合至軟片帶之前緣4 4 3 ,或 本紙張尺度適財國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公髮)^ 一-- I-----^---·-----------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498692 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 69 五、發明說明() 者係藉由連接兩個帶體而形成。(前導帶440之末緣及 前緣係皆與前導帶4 4 0之縱向側緣S 1相連接,並且彼 此相對。同樣地,軟片帶2 2 0之末緣及前緣係皆連接至 軟片帶之縱向側緣S 2,並且係彼此相對)。接著,前導 帶4 4 0係可以手動地穿過該數位軟片處理系統3 0 1。 詳言之,該前導帶4 4 0係可以穿過一運送系統3 0 9 a 。在此一示例性實施例中,運送系統3 0 9 a係包含一第 一夾擠滾輪機構4 3 5、一第二夾擠滾輪機構4 3 7以及 一第三夾擠滾輪機構4 3 9。每一夾擠滾輪機構4 3 5、 437及439係具有一對前緣轉輪436F,其係與一 軸桿4 3 8相連接,以及一對後緣轉輪4 3 6 B,其係與 一軸桿(圖上未顯示)相連接。針對每一夾擠滾輪機構, 該前導帶4 4 0係穿過位在前導器之一橫向側緣上之轉輪 4 3 6 F與一轉輪4 3 6 B之間,並且亦穿過位在前導器 之相對側緣之轉輪4 3 6 F與4 3 6 B之間。亦可視需要 而提供其他的夾擠滾輪機構。 該示例性運送系統3 0 9 a亦包括一驅動夾擠滾輪機 構4 3 3,其係包括有連接至一軸桿4 3 4之轉輪4 3 2 以及連接至一軸桿(圖上未顯示)之轉輪4 3 2 b。前導 帶4 4 0之橫向側緣係穿過轉輪4 3 2 F及4 3 2 B之間 。該軸桿4 3 4係由一驅動機構4 3 〇所驅動,且係包含 一馬達,諸如一 A C或D C馬達,或者係可包含一紋盤驅 動器組件◦一旦該前導帶4 4 0穿過最後一組轉輪 4 3 2 F及4 3 2 B之後,該驅動機構4 3 0便可啓動來 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -----1-1--.------------訂---------線^^· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498692 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 轉動該轉輪432F及/或432B,以將前導帶440 及所黏合之軟片2 2 0拉動而穿過另外三個被動夾擠滾輪 4 3 5、4 3 7及4 3 9。因此,驅動機構4 3 0主要係 藉由主動夾擠滾輪機構4 3 3來拉動或抽引該前導帶 4 4 0及所黏合之軟片2 2 〇通過該系統3 0 1。該滾輪 機構4 3 5、4 3 7及4 3 9係被動式滾輪,並且對於拉 動該前導帶4 4 0及軟片2 2 0之張力提供某些程度的阻 力。拉緊該軟片2 2 0係相當具有優點的,因爲這可以降 低軟片卡住或扭曲,且確保該畫面在被掃描的同時係保持 平坦及拉緊狀態。最好’在本實例之各個夾擠滾輪之間係 具有均勻的拉張力分佈。 當軟片2 2 0係移動通過軟片顯影系統3 0 1時,該 軟片2 2 0便可以被拉緊或形成弓形形狀4 4 4,諸如藉 由使用一軟片之弓形支撐表面或者係弓形邊緣導引件。正 面或背面掃描站4 4 6 F及4 4 6 B係可以在該顯影軟片 呈現弓形形狀的同時來記錄該正面、背面、正面穿透及/ 或背面穿透訊號。這些工站4 4 6 F及4 4 6 B係可包括 正面及背面射線源及感應器,諸如藉由上述針對其他數位 顯影實施例所說明之方式。最好,此一示例性實施例之工 站4 4 6 F及4 4 6 B係分開安裝,且當有需要時,其係 易於由系統3 0 1中移除。 依照本發明之另一特徵,由於圖2 4之運送系統 3 0 9 a在該軟片2 2 0之長度上係僅包括一驅動點(經 由驅動機構4 3 0 ),因此該軟片卡住及扭曲之風險便可 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -----^—-------------訂---------線· (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 498692 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 以大大地降低。在軟片2 2 0之長度上配置較多的驅動組 件,係較有可能會產生軟片卡片或扭曲的情況,除非該多 個組件之驅動速度係可以精確地配合。再者,由於在圖 2 4所示之數位軟片顯影系統3 〇 1中係使用前導帶 4 4 0,因此軟片2 2 0係不需要手動地處理以及穿過該 系統。相反地,該軟片2 2 0僅需要連接至前導帶4 4 0 即可,其中該前導帶4 4 0接著便會使該軟片2 2 0通過 該系統,藉此減少軟片2 2 0之處理過程,以降低軟片受 損、髒污或受到其他不當影響之風險。 如圖2 5所示,一旦該前導帶4 4 0之前緣4 4 7沿 著圖示之方向而穿過該系統3 0 1時,其便可加以在疊接 點4 4 8處加以反折而連接至軟片帶2 2 0之末緣4 4 9 。因此,軟片2 2 0以及前導帶4 4 0便可以在位置 4 4 2以及4 4 8處疊接在一起,並且構成一連續的環圈 。將前導帶4 4 0連接至軟片2 2 0之末緣4 4 9的一個 優點係在於,一旦先前之軟片帶2 2 0已經由系統3 0 1 處理完成之後,該前導帶4 4 0係不需要手動地穿過該系 統3 0 1來導入一新的軟片帶。相反地,前導帶4 4 0將 隨著先前之軟片帶2 2 0當其欲由工站4 4 6 F及 4 4 6 B掃描時而通過該系統3 0 1 ,藉此,其便可以使 下一個欲加以處理之軟片帶自動地重新穿過。一旦在軟片 2 2 0上之處理已完成時,其便可以由前導帶4 4 0上脫 離。該前導帶4 4 0將保持穿入於系統3 0 1中’且將具 有一易於疊接至下一個欲進行數位式顯影之軟片帶之邊緣 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ---------------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 74 498692 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 。因此,在圖2 5之示例性實例中,該系統3 0 1之操作 者僅需要在開始使用時打開該系統一次以手動地穿過該前 導帶4 4 0即可。在下一使用時,該前導帶4 4 0將會自 動地穿過。此外,由於前導帶係可藉由連接至軟片末緣而 再循環使用,因此同一前導帶4 4 0係可用以處理多個軟 片帶。因此,便可以避免針對每一軟片帶而使用一個不同 的前導帶。 圖2 6係顯示數位軟片顯影系統3 0 1 '之另一變化實 施例。在此一實施例中,其係提供有兩個前導帶4 4 0 L 及4 4 Ο T,其中一個係穿過該系統且在位置4 4 2上疊 接至軟片2 2 0之前緣4 4 3,而另一個則係在位置點 448處疊接至軟片220之末緣44 9。相同於圖25 所示,圖2 6之系統係需要進行一次前導帶手動穿過之操 作。接著,軟片2 2 0便可以在位置4 4 2處疊接至第一 前導帶4 4 0 L,且該軟片係可以在位置4 4 8處疊接至 由滾筒4 5 0所供應之第二前導帶4 4 0 T。一旦第一前 導帶4 4 0 L及軟片2 2 0被拉動通過該驅動機構4 3 0 之後,則便可以收集或捲繞在捲筒4 5 2上。該末緣前導 帶4 4 0 T接著將自動地穿過該系統3 0 1 ',因爲其係藉 由軟片2 2 0疊接於位置4 4 8所致。該末緣前導帶 4 4 0 T之外露端接著便可以截斷’並且疊接至下一捲欲 由數位軟片顯影系統3 0 1 '加以處理之軟片2 2 0。 圖2 8係顯示另一個數位軟片顯影系統3 0 3,其係 疊接一前導帶至軟片2 2 0。在此一實施例中,該數位軟 ___—__ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -----ί. —-—--------訂---------線^^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A7 B7____ 7λ 五、發明說明() 片顯影系統3 0 3之運送系統3 0 9 b係包括數個滾輪 4 6 6,於其上環繞有軟片及前導帶,以運送通過該系統 3 0 3。爲了驅動軟片2 2 0及所連接之前導帶通過該系 統3 0 3 ,該運送系統3 0 9 b在靠近系統3 0 3之外側 4 7 6處係包括一紋盤驅動器4 6 4。該紋盤驅動器 4 6 4係包括一馬達或其他致動器,其可提供旋轉運動, 以及包括一對夾擠滾輪4 6 5。該夾擠滾輪4 6 5係可以 藉由致動器之作用力而轉動。一拉緊器4 6 2係位在靠近 系統3 0 9 b之相對側邊或輸入側邊4 7 8處,其中該拉 緊器係包括一對夾擠滾輪4 6 7。軟片及所連接之前導帶 便可以在滾輪4 6 7之間移動,其中該滾輪係接觸或夾擠 該軟片/前導帶,並且提供該軟片/前導帶移動時之阻力 。由拉緊器4 6 2所提供之阻力係可以調整的,諸如藉由 調整作用在滾輪4 6 7之間的接觸力而達成。任何用以移 動該拉緊器4 6 2之滾輪4 6 7以形成較緊密接觸之任何 裝置皆可適用於此一目的。 依照本發明之此一特徵,其係以單一紋盤驅動器 4 6 4係拉動該軟片/前導帶通過系統3 0 3,並且由拉 緊器4 6 2及/或其他滾輪4 6 6所提供之阻力,而在軟 片上提供拉張力,以避免軟片卡住或扭曲,並且提供更精 確的掃描影像。所提供之拉張力係可以藉由調整該拉緊器 4 6 2來加以調整,且該軟片之移動速度係可以藉由調整 紋盤驅動器4 6 4來加以調整。 該軟片2 2 0係可以由一施配器4 7 0來加以饋入’ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) I -----r----------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498692 A7 B7 五、發明說明(74) 且該前導帶4 4 0係由一施配器4 6 8來加以饋入。如前 所述,該前導帶4 4 0係可以疊接於每一軟片帶2 2 0之 前緣及後緣端。亦可採用一疊接器4 7 2,以有助於接合 該前導帶440與軟片220。 當前導帶4 4 0已經饋入至系統且該第一軟片畫面f 已經到達該施配器3 1 0時,顯影劑便可以經由該施配器 3 1 0而供應至軟片,其中該施配器係可以由一槽縫塗覆 器(S C )所構成。當軟片畫面F沿著圖示之路徑而移動 時’該軟片畫面接者便可以開始顯影。一*第一^映像模組 5 0 2係可掃描該軟片畫面,並且在一第一顯影時間產生 一第一數位影像檔。當軟片2 2 0持續行經該系統3 0 3 時,其便持續地顯影,直到其到達一第二映像模組5 〇 4 ,且在該處,於第二軟片顯影時間產生一第二數位影像檔 。該軟片係持續顯影,直到其到達第三映像模組5 〇 6, 其係在第二軟片顯影時間產生一第二映像檔。此三個數位 影像檔接著便疊合在一起而產生一個影像資料檔,其包括 在所有三個顯影時間中存在於畫面上之影像特徵。因此, 在由最後一個模組5 0 6加以掃描之前,該軟片之全部顯 影時間便係軟片由位置A (由施配器3 1 0施加顯景多齊υ ) 移動至位置B (藉由掃描軟片而產生最後一*個數位影像權^ )之時間。 圖2 9係顯示圖2 8之系統3 0 3的另一個變化實施 例。在此一實施例中,一系統5 0 3係以一種類似於圖 2 8之系統3 0 3的方式來加以操作。然而,依照本發明 ____ -----------L-----------訂---------線赢 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A7 _B7 五、發明說明() 之另一特徵,圖2 9之系統5 0 3係採用一單一掃描模組 5 0 2,藉此降低設備尺寸及成本。利用圖2 9之系統係 可以在多次顯影時間中來進行掃描,其係藉由在模組 5 0 2之任一側邊上提供一具有一對組合之裝置/拉緊器 5 6 2之組合體來達成。這些驅動/拉緊器5 6 2係可以 驅動該軟片以向前方向5 0 5或向後方向5 0 7來通過掃 描模組5 0 2。因此,這些驅動器/拉緊器5 6 2皆包括 一可逆轉的或雙向的馬達或致動器。爲了進行畫面之第一 次掃描,該軟片2 2 0係可以經由模組5 0 2而將其沿著 向前方向5 0 5來加以驅動。一旦這些首次掃描完成時, 則驅動器/拉緊器5 6 2便可以反轉以驅動該軟片2 2 0 沿著向後方向5 0 7而通過模組5 0 2。在反向運動期間 係可以進行第二次顯影時間的掃描,並進而在多次顯影時 間來進行多次掃描。或者,僅藉由驅動器/拉緊器5 6 2 來將該軟片2 2 0快速地反轉,而不需要進行掃描,然後 ,在第二次顯影時間中將其沿向前方向5 0 5來加以驅動 ,並在此期間進行掃描。在另一種方式中,該軟片2 2 0 及前導帶4 4 0係可以連結成一環圈,且整個環圈係在軟 片2 2 0多次顯影時間中通過該掃描模組5 0 2。施加至 軟片/前導帶之張力係可以藉由調整由該驅動器/拉緊器 5 6 2所供應之阻力來加以調整。再者,當一驅動器/拉 緊器5 6 2係主動地驅動該驅動器/拉緊器5 6 2時,另 一個驅動器/拉緊器5 6 2則可以在驅動方向上提供阻抗 ,而使得在軟片/前導帶中所提供之張力可以更精確地進 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------r---------------訂---------線^^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498692 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 行掃描及軟片運送。 圖27a、27b及27c係顯示依照本發明之另一 特徵之運送元件,其係包含一可以使用在一運送系統中以 運送軟片及黏合於其上之前導帶之滾輪4 6 0。此一滾輪 460係可用以做爲在圖24、25及26中所示之滾輪 機構的另一種變化方式。 在滾輪4 6 0之此一實施例中,一對鏈輪4 6 2 L及 4 6 2 R係由一筒狀輪軸或冠狀滾輪4 6 6所連接。該鏈 輪4 6 2 L及4 6 2 R係大致隔開大約相同於軟片帶之寬 度’使得該鏈輪齒4 6 4可以與位在軟片帶上之鏈輪孔相 銜接。該鏈輪齒4 6 4係可以沿著鏈輪4 6 2 L及 4 6 2 R而適當地隔開,以配合位在軟片帶之邊緣上的鏈 輪孔的間距。該鏈輪4 6 2 L及4 6 2 R係可以與具有不 同寬度晶圓W之冠狀滾輪4 6 6互換,使得其可以配合各 種不同的軟片寬度。 圖27a、27b及27c之滾輪460係可以配合 一前導帶,但在其邊緣上並未具有鏈輪孔,然而其仍可以 將該前導帶導正於滾輪上。因此,便可以採用成本較低的 前導帶材料。舉例來說,上述針對圖2 4、2 5及2 6所 述之前導帶4 4 0係可包含一未具有黏膠且未具有鏈輪孔 之帶狀材料。塑膠、金屬、或者係玻璃紙材料或其他適當 的長條帶或材料帶,皆可用以做爲該前導帶4 4 0之材料 。此一前導帶4 4 0當其饋入通過該系統時,其係可以跨 置在冠狀滾輪4 6 6之外表面4 6 8。一旦該末端軟片 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 χ 297公釐) ------r---.------------訂---------線^^· (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498692 A7 B7 五、發明說明(77) 2 2 0到達滾輪4 6 0時’該齒部4 6 4將可以銜接位在 軟片邊緣上之鏈輪孔。任何疊接於軟片末端之末緣前導帶 接著便可以跨置在冠狀滾輪4 6 6。此一設計係顯示在圖 27中。軟片220係跨置在轉輪462之齒部464, 且該前導帶4 4 0係跨置在冠狀滾輪4 6 6上。該末緣前 導帶4 4 0係必須略窄於軟片2 2 0,以使其能以上述方 式來作動。詳言之,爲了能夠跨置在冠狀滾輪4 6 6 ,該 末緣前導帶4 4 0之寬度係必須小於圖2 7 c所示寬度晶 圓W。 冠狀滾輪4 6 6之外表面4 6 8在其縱長方向上可以 係弓形或筒狀,如圖2 7 c所示,以保持該前導帶對正。 藉由此一設計,因爲具有最大直徑之冠狀滾輪4 6 6之部 分P係具有一比冠狀滾輪之其餘部分還快的轉動速度。藉 此,圖27a、27b及27c之運送滾輪460便可以 做爲雙重功能的滾輪,其可以運送具有鏈輪孔之軟片,以 及運送成本較低且未具有鏈輪孔之前導帶材料。因爲鏈輪 係銜接在軟片之邊緣部位,因此不會碰軟片之中央表面, 進而降低了該中央表面受損之風險。 以上本發明示例性實施例之說明僅係做爲圖示及說明 之用。本發明並未限制於上述之任何細節,且在看完上述 說明之後,仍可以對本發明進行修飾及變化。雖然以上已 經針對數個示例性及變化實施例、方法、系統、造型及可 能的應用詳加說明,然而可以瞭解的是,在不脫離本發明 之範圍內,其仍可以採用許多不同的變化方式。再者,雖 --- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ▼裝--------訂--------- 498692 A7 B7 78 五、發明說明() 然以上已經說明各種可能的設計及元件,然而可以瞭解的 是,在不脫離本發明之範圍內,其仍可以具有許多其他的 設計及元件。 因此,應瞭解的是,上述所說明之實施例及實例係用 以闡述本發明之原理及其實際的應用,以期使對於本技術 有普通瞭解之人士,能以不同的實施例以及適合特殊用途 之不同變化型式來實施本發明。因此,本發明之範圍係由 後附之申請專利範圍所界定。 -------^ ^--------訂---------線舞 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)RQ V. Description of the invention () on the image plane). The roller 9 1 0 remains axially stationary, that is, it does not move axially relative to the fixed shaft 9 1 4. However, if necessary, the roller 9 1 2 can be indexed or can be moved axially to achieve the purpose of adjusting the interval between the rollers 9 1 0 and 9 1 2 to match various different sizes of films. . The axial intervals of the rollers 9 1 0 and 9 1 2 are the same as those selected between the individual belts in the belt group 8 3 0. With this interval, contact between the control surface and the central portion of the film strip 8 0 8 can be quite favorably avoided, and the central portion of the film strip 8 0 8 can be easily scanned without being transported. System interference. The scanning of the film strip 8 0 8 at the image part 8 2 4 can also be performed by a slit 9 1 5 in the fixed shaft 9 1 4, where the slit is connected with the roller 9 1 0 and 9 1 2 The intervals are relatively even. This aligned slit 9 1 5 can provide a line of sight of one of the sensors 8 2 0 above the control surface 9 4 0. It should also be noted here that the ray source and waveguide 8 1 7 a and 8 1 7 b on the front side of the film strip 8 0 8 can also be positioned in the film between the rollers 9 1 0 and 9 1 2 Take the top. Figures 16 and 16a show another modified embodiment of the control surface characteristics of the present invention. In this embodiment, the film strip 8 0 8 is inserted into the gap between a pair of rollers with opposite directions, that is, between a pair of high-friction driving rollers 6 0 0 and a pair of spare rollers 6 0 2 . Individual rollers 600a, 60Ob, 602a, and 602b in each pair of rollers are shown in Figure 16a. The film strip 8 0 8 is then fed through a pair of rollers 6 0 4 arranged side by side (only one of the rolls is shown in the figure. 42----------. ------------ Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 498692 A7 ______B7 5 2. The control surface formed by the invention description (60) wheel 9400. A second pair of wheels with opposite steering, that is, a high-friction roller 6 0 6 and a spare roller 6 0 8 are positioned on opposite sides of a control flat surface formed by the rollers 6 0 and 6 0 2 , And the film strip 8 0 8 is fed into the gap between the second pair of rollers 6 0 6 and 6 0 8. Each of the driving rollers 6 06 and 6 0 8 can be driven to rotate faster than the driving roller 6 0 0. This imbalance in speed will cause the film strip 8 0 8 to appear in a tensioned state, causing the film to be tightly pulled by the control flat surface 9 4 0. However, the driving roller 6 06 may also have a release clutch to prevent excessive tension from being applied to the film strip 8 0 8. Therefore, the speed of the driving roller 608 can be used to control the speed of the film strip 808, and the driving roller 606 can be used to control the film strip 608 by controlling the surface tension. As with the aforementioned control surface, the control flat surface shown in FIG. 16 is composed of two rollers having the same interval as the film size, so that it can only contact the lateral edge of the film strip 8 0 8 without You will touch the central part containing the hidden image (on which the developer has been applied). Similarly, when the control surface 9 4 0 is currently reached, the film strip 8 0 8 is transported to the plane of the image plane 9 40 between the waveguides 8 1 7, 8 1 7 b and 8 1 9 a, 8 Scanning between 1 9 b. Another modified embodiment of the characteristics of the control surface of the present invention is shown in FIG. 17, which uses a pair of small, stretchable high friction belts 70 0 to push the film strip 8 0 8 against the control surface. 9 4 0. The two friction belts 7 0 0 (only one is shown in Fig. 17) are in contact with the opposite sides of the film strip 8 0 8 and the film strip 8 8 is pushed to-^ This paper size is applicable to the country of China Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ---------------------- Order --------- line (please read first Note on the back, please fill out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 498692 A7 ____B7 V. Description of the invention (61) Location and direction suitable for scanning. The friction belt 7 0 0 extends between a pair of rollers 7 0 2 and 7 0 4 'and is located on the opposite side of the control surface 9 4 0. It is also preferable to supply driving force to the image roller, and use the pair of end rollers 7 0 2 7 0 4 as an idler pulley. Although the film system can be directly driven through the digital film developing system described above, Fig. 18 shows another method and system for driving film through such a system according to another feature of the present invention. In this embodiment, the flexible sheet 2 2 0 and the flexible sheet 2 2 0 B are supplied to a tape or a belt 5 2 0. Any suitable bonding device or substance can be used to bond the flexible sheets 2 2 0 A and 2 2 0 B to an adhesive tape, such as an adhesive. Once the film is attached to the tape, the tape 520 can be driven directly through the film development system, such as using a sprocket or roller. A sprocket hole 5 2 2 may be provided on the edge of the tape 5 2 0 to drive the tape using a sprocket system. As shown in the example shown in FIG. 18, the tape 5 2 0 is extended from the side edge 5 3 〇 A of the film strip 2 2 〇 A, and is extended from the side edge 5 3 〇 B of the film strip 2 2 〇 A Thus, the tape extension A is formed. These extensions A can be contacted and moved by a film transport mechanism near the side edges 5 2 1 and 5 2 3 of the adhesive tape 5 2 0. For example, the sprocket hole 5 2 2 in the extension A can be engaged by a sprocket to directly transport the adhesive tape 5 2 0 and indirectly transport the bonded flexible film tapes 220A and 220B. The tape 5 2 0 may be formed of a base made of plastic, polyester, polyvinyl acetate, polyvinyl chloride, my 1 a r, paper or other suitable material. A glue, such as acrylic or rubber resin, can be used to fix the soft-^ 64 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) --------- -. ------------ Order --------- line (please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) 498692 Printed by A7 B7, Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economy V. Description of the invention (62) Sheets with 2 2 0 A and 2 2 OB. Preferably, the tape 5 2 0 and the adhesive system can penetrate the scanning rays so that they will not interfere with the scanning process. For example, ’If infrared film is used to scan the film strips 2 2 0 A, 2 2 0 B, the tape 5 2 0 is preferably made to allow the infrared light to pass through. Adhesive and / or tape may also include one or more developer substances to help make the image on the film and / or any material (such as a barcode) near the edge of the film visible. By using this tape 5 2 0, the system can easily fit a variety of different sizes of film. For example, the film 220 A may contain an APS film strip, and the film 220 B may contain a 35 mm film strip. The tape 5 2 0 has a sufficient width to fit various film widths (i.e., W0 > W2 > W1). Therefore, the same film transport developing system can be used to scan a variety of different types of films, without the need to provide different hard systems and components for different types of films. Therefore, regardless of the width (W 1 and W 2) or the size or spacing of the sprocket holes 5 2 7, there is no difference between the films 2 2 0 A and 2 2 0 B to be scanned by the digital film processing system. Consistency is required. In addition, the use of the tape 5 2 0 can arrange the alignment marks 5 2 4 at different positions of the tape 5 2 0. These marks 5 2 4 can be interpreted by a digital film processing system to help parse and align the digital image data file and ensure proper frame alignment during the digital film development process. For example, this mark 5 2 4 series can be read by infrared cameras, magnetic heads, scanning devices or other devices, so as to provide this paper size applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) --------------------- Order --------- line (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The paper size printed by the employee consumer cooperative is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498692 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (63) The feedback signal is used to identify the position of different pictures and different types of films Belts, different development times, and more. Furthermore, this mark 5 2 4 can be used to provide feedback to the conveying motor 'to control the rate of conveyance of the film through the system. This feedback can also start or activate the film image scanning process at different points in the film development process. In addition, 'the mark 5 2 4 can also generate digital data during the digital scanning process, so that different digital images obtained from each film layer and / or from different film development times can be aligned. This mark 5 2 4 series can be arranged after every η sprocket holes 5 2 2, and its series η is a positive integer. Figure 19 shows other advantages of using the tape 5 2 0 to transport the film 2 2 0. In this embodiment, the adhesive tape 5 2 0 and the adhered flexible sheet 2 2 0 are driven by a set of driving wheels 5 2 6, wherein the roller is located near one side edge 5 of the adhesive tape 5 2 0 2 1 is punched, and another set of driving wheels 5 2 8 is punched at a position near the other side edge 5 2 3 of the tape 5 2 0. The developer 5 2 8 is applied to the surface 2 2 6 of the film 2 2 0 so that the film can be developed when it is scanned by a scanning or imaging device such as described in FIGS. 1 to 3. If the edge of the film 2 2 0 is directly driven by the wheels 5 2 6 and 5 2 8, the developer 5 2 8 may form a piping near the edge of the film 2 2 0, where the piping ratio is The other parts of the developer are thicker. However, in the embodiment of FIG. 19, since the tape 5 2 0 is wider than the developing film 2 2 0, the developer 5 2 8 will spill to the edge 5 3 0 of the film. Although it is still possible to form burrs 532 near the edge 5 3 0, as shown in Figure 19, if these burrs 532 are located at --------- ^ --------- --Order --------- line (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 498692 A7 ______B7_ V. Description of Invention (64) Edge 5 3 0 When it is outside, it will not interfere with the scanning operation. Furthermore, if the film 2 2 0 is directly driven by a driving device, such as a driving wheel 5 2 8 or a sprocket, the developer 5 2 8 cannot completely cover the image to be scanned, thus making the image And the development of the image hidden on it cannot be consistent. Furthermore, in this direct film drive design, the developer 5 2 8 series will contact the drive device and interfere with each other, so it needs frequent maintenance and cleaning. Furthermore, if the film is directly driven by the drive device, information such as the film type and aspect ratio information, which is recorded on the edge of the film near the film, cannot be read. Some film types, such as APS film, include a magnetic and / or optical strip near the edge of the film 5 3 0, which includes information for each frame. If the film 2 2 0 is directly driven by two edges Time, and this band cannot be read. In addition, some film manufacturers provide a bar code on the edge of the film, which provides information related to the composition of the film photosensitizer. If the film 2 2 0 is directly driven by both edges, the bar code cannot be read take. Furthermore, transporting the film directly through a digital film processing system causes the hidden image on the film to be blocked. However, as shown in FIG. 19, when the film 2 2 is driven indirectly by using the tape 5 2 0, the developer 5 2 8 can completely cover the entire film with a substantially uniform layer. On the width. Furthermore, the risk of the developer 5 2 8 coming into contact with the driving wheels 5 2 6 and 5 2 8 can be reduced, otherwise the developer will pass through the sprocket hole and come into contact with the film transport and scanning equipment. Can interfere with operation and / or require more frequent maintenance / cleaning. In addition, the tape 5 2 0 has sufficient width to make this paper size applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) ----- ** — · -------- -—Order --------- ^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 498692 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (65) You should get closer The parts contacted or driven by the driving wheels 5 2 6 and 5 2 8 have a large area, so it can provide the best retention of the tape, and reduce the chance of the wheel slipping or other errors in transportation. Furthermore, using a tape adhesive member 5 2 0 such as shown in FIG. 19 can make the film developer develop the barcode arranged on the side edge 5 3 0 of the film 2 2 0, so that the barcode can be read. It is used by digital film processing systems. In addition, the use of the tape 5 2 0 allows magnetic, optical and / or other data recorded on the side 5 3 0 of the film 2 2 0 to be read and used during the development of the digital film. For example, aspect ratio data read from an AP film can be used to adjust the size of an image formed from digital data. In addition, the tape 5 2 0 can prevent the edge portion of the hidden image on the film 2 2 from being covered by the film conveying device because the device is in contact with the tape 5 2 2 instead of directly contacting the film. Figures 20 and 21 show possible ways of applying tape to a film to transport it through a digital film processing system. In the embodiment of FIG. 20, an adhesive 5 3 6 can be applied on the surface 5 4 0 of the adhesive tape 5 2 0. The bottom surface 2 2 8 of the flexible sheet 2 2 0 can then be adhered to the surface 5 4 0 of the adhesive tape 5 2 0. Once the flexible sheet 2 2 0 and the adhesive tape 5 2 0 are bonded together, part A of the adhesive tape 5 2 0 will extend from the edge 5 3 0 of the flexible sheet 2 2 0. Part A of the tape 5 2 0 can be engaged by a driving device, and the tape / film assembly can be transported. In the embodiment of FIG. 21, the two parts of the tape, 5 2 0 A and 5 2 0 B, can be adhered to the opposite side edges 530 of the flexible sheet 2 2 0. The adhesive part B of the adhesive tapes 520A and 520B is adhered to the paper size and applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ----- —'------------ Order ------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) (%) A7 _____B7_____ 5. Description of the invention (66) The flexible sheet 220, and the extending part A of the tape 520A, 520B is extended from the side edge 5 2 0 of the flexible sheet 2 2 0. Therefore, the 'extended portion A is engaged by a driving device to transport the tape / film assembly. Furthermore, in the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 21, it is preferable that the part B of the adhesive tape does not cover any part of the image or information recorded on the film. Therefore, this design will reduce the risk of interference between the entire tape 5 2 A or 5 2 0 B and any light applied to the film 2 2 0 during scanning. Furthermore, this design is such that the tapes 5 2 0 A, 5 2 0 B can be impenetrable or penetrable with respect to the scanning rays. Other variations are also possible. For example, the edge of the tape can be a double edge that is folded back and adhered to prevent the adhesive from being exposed to the film or hardware device. This design is shown in Figure 2-2. As shown in the figure, the edge 5 2 1 of the tape sheet 5 2 0 A is folded back and is brought into close contact with the first edge 5 3 0A of the soft sheet 2 2 0, and the edge 5 2 of the tape sheet 5 2 0 B 3 is also folded back to fit the second edge 5 3 0 B of the film 2 2 0. Therefore, the adhesive can be located on the upper surface 535 of the adhesive tape pieces 520A and 520B without contacting other devices and surfaces. Other variations can also be implemented. The adhesive can also be present only between the film 2 2 0 and the adhesive tape 5 2 0 to prevent it from interfering with the exposed adhesive. Furthermore, in another variation, the tape may be applied to a single edge 5 3 0 of the film 2 2 0 instead of being applied to both edges of the film at the same time. Then, the width of the tape can be adjusted so that the film 2 2 0 can be approximately the width of a larger film, and thus 49- ------- ^ ---------- ---- Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) In the transport system designed for larger film. In this design, one edge of the film 220 and one edge of the tape 520 are transported by a film transport system. FIG. 23 shows an embodiment of a digital film processing system 305, which uses the tape transport design shown in FIGS. 18-2. The system 3 0 5 includes a tape supply dispenser 5 6 8 and a film / tape bonder 5 7 2. The film / tape coupler 5 7 2 adheres the tape to the film, such as previously described for FIGS. 18-2 2. In this embodiment, a plurality of rollers 4 6 6 are used to contact and guide the side edge of the tape. In order to drive the tape and the combined film through the system, a winch drive 4 6 4 is located near the leading edge of the system 3 5 4 7 6. The winch drive 4 6 4 may include a motor or other actuator that is used to provide rotary motion, and includes a pair of pinch rollers 4 6 5. The pinch roller 4 6 5 can be rotated by the force of an actuator, and the tape is pinched between the roller 4 6 5 to contact the edge of the tape, and the tape passes through the system 3 0, which then presses the adhered film through the system. Close to the opposite sides of the system 3 0 5 is a tensioner 4 6 2 which includes a pair of pinch rollers 4 6 7. The tape moves between the rollers 4 6 7 and it touches or pinches the edges of the tape and provides resistance to its movement. The impedance provided by the tensioner 4 6 2 can be adjusted, such as by adjusting the contact force applied between the rollers 4 6 7. As mentioned above, it is preferred that the rollers 46 5, 466 and 467 are only in direct contact with the adhesive tape. However, as mentioned above, you can also try to make one of these rollers contact the side edge of the tape. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) i -------*- ---------- Order --------- line (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy 498692 A7 ——_ B7__ 5 2. Description of the invention (68), and the other side edge is in contact with the adhered soft sheet. When the film and the adhered film are transported through the system, and the first film frame has reached the dispenser 3 1 0, the developer can be applied to the screen through the dispenser 3 1 0, where the dispenser is Contains a slot applicator (sc). When the film frame is moved along the path shown in the figure, the film frame can then be developed. A first imaging module 502 can scan the film frame and generate a first digital image file at a first development time. When the film 2 2 0 continues to pass through the system 3 0 3 'it will be developed in a drawing' until it reaches a 'second imaging module 5 0 4', and at this point, a second is generated at the second film development time Digital image files. The film is continuously developed 'until it reaches the second imaging module 506', which generates a second image file during the development time of the second film. These three digital image files are then superimposed together to produce an image data file, which includes the image features present on the screen during all three development times. Therefore, before scanning by the last module 506, the entire development time of the film is that the film is moved from position A (developer applied by dispenser 3 1 0) to position B (the final result is generated by scanning the film A digital image file). As soon as the reel 5 7 4 is collected, the tape and the adhered film can be collected at the end of the process. The exemplary digital film development system described above can employ several devices, materials, and methods to introduce a film strip into the system. For example, according to a feature of the present invention, and as shown in FIG. 24, a leading tape 4 4 0 is serially connected to the film strip 2 2 0 at the overlapping point 4 4 2, wherein the overlapping point is borrowed By adhering the leading edge 4 4 1 of the leading tape to the leading edge 4 4 3 of the film tape, or the national standard (CNS) A4 size of this paper (210 X 297) ^ I-I ---- -^ -------------- Order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Printing A7 B7 69 V. Description of the invention () The one is formed by connecting two bands. (The leading edge and leading edge of the leading strip 440 are connected to the longitudinal side edges S 1 of the leading strip 4 4 0 and are opposed to each other. Similarly, the trailing edge and leading edge of the flexible strip 2 2 0 are both connected to the flexible sheet. The longitudinal side edges S 2 of the belt are opposite each other). Next, the leading tape 440 can be manually passed through the digital film processing system 301. In detail, the leading belt 4 40 can pass through a transport system 3 0 9 a. In this exemplary embodiment, the transport system 3 0 9a includes a first pinch roller mechanism 4 35, a second pinch roller mechanism 4 37, and a third pinch roller mechanism 4 39. Each pinch roller mechanism 4 3 5, 437 and 439 has a pair of leading edge runners 436F, which are connected to a shaft 4 3 8 and a pair of trailing edge runners 4 3 6 B, which are connected to a shaft Rods (not shown). For each pinch roller mechanism, the leading belt 4 40 passes through a runner 4 3 6 F and a runner 4 3 6 B on a lateral side edge of the leader, and also passes through the position. Between the wheels 4 3 6 F and 4 3 6 B on the opposite side edges of the leader. Other pinch roller mechanisms are available upon request. The exemplary transport system 3 0 9a also includes a drive pinch roller mechanism 4 3 3, which includes a runner 4 3 2 connected to a shaft 4 3 4 and a shaft (not shown) connected to a shaft Runner 4 3 2 b. The lateral side edge of the leading band 4 4 0 passes between the runners 4 3 2 F and 4 3 2 B. The shaft 4 3 4 is driven by a driving mechanism 4 3 0, and includes a motor, such as an AC or DC motor, or may include a disk drive assembly. Once the front guide belt 4 4 0 passes through the end After a set of wheels 4 3 2 F and 4 3 2 B, the driving mechanism 4 3 0 can be started. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ----- 1 -1--. ------------ Order --------- line ^^ · (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) 498692 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () Turn the wheel 432F and / or 432B to pull the leading belt 440 and the bonded film 2 2 0 through the other three passive pinch rollers 4 3 5, 4 3 7 and 4 3 9. Therefore, the driving mechanism 4 3 0 mainly pulls or draws the leading belt 4 4 0 and the adhered soft film 2 2 0 through the system 3 1 by actively pinching the roller mechanism 4 3 3. The roller mechanism 4 3 5, 4, 37, and 4 39 are passive rollers, and provide a certain degree of resistance to the tension of the leading belt 4 4 0 and the flexible sheet 2 2 0. Tightening the film 2 2 0 is quite advantageous because it can reduce film jamming or distortion and ensure that the screen is kept flat and stretched while being scanned. It is preferable that there is a uniform tension distribution among the pinch rollers of this example. When the film 2 2 0 is moved through the film development system 3 01, the film 2 2 0 can be tightened or formed into an arcuate shape 4 4 4 such as by using the arched support surface of a film or guided by an arched edge Pieces. The front or back scanning stations 4 4 6 F and 4 4 6 B can record the front, back, front penetration, and / or back penetration signals while the developing film assumes an arcuate shape. These workstations 4 4 6 F and 4 4 6 B may include front and back radiation sources and sensors, such as in the manner described above for other digital development embodiments. Preferably, the stations 4 4 6 F and 4 4 6 B of this exemplary embodiment are installed separately, and they are easily removed from the system 301 when necessary. According to another feature of the present invention, since the transport system 3 0 9 a of FIG. 24 includes only one driving point (via the driving mechanism 4 3 0) in the length of the film 2 2 0, the film is stuck and distorted. The risk is that this paper size can apply Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----- ^ —------------- Order ------ --- Line · (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) 498692 A7 B7 printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention Description () to greatly reduce. If more driving components are arranged on the length of the film 220, it is more likely that a film card or a distortion occurs, unless the driving speed of the multiple components can be precisely matched. Furthermore, since the digital film developing system 3 01 shown in FIG. 24 uses a leading tape 4 40, the film 2 20 does not need to be manually processed and passed through the system. Conversely, the film 2 2 0 only needs to be connected to the leading tape 4 4 0, where the leading tape 4 4 0 then passes the film 2 2 0 through the system, thereby reducing the processing of the film 2 2 0 To reduce the risk of film damage, dirt, or other undue influence. As shown in FIG. 2, once the leading edge 4 4 0 passes through the system 3 0 1 in the direction shown in the figure, it can be folded back at the overlapping point 4 4 8 It is connected to the trailing edge 4 4 9 of the film strip 2 2 0. Therefore, the flexible sheet 2 2 0 and the leading strip 4 4 0 can be overlapped together at positions 4 4 2 and 4 4 8 and form a continuous loop. One advantage of connecting the leading strip 4 4 0 to the trailing edge 4 4 9 of the film 2 2 0 is that once the previous film strip 2 2 0 has been processed by the system 3 0 1, the leading strip 4 4 0 is not A new film strip needs to be manually passed through the system 301. Conversely, the leading tape 4 4 0 will pass the system 3 0 1 with the previous film tape 2 2 0 when it is to be scanned by the stations 4 4 6 F and 4 4 6 B, whereby it can make The next film to be processed is automatically re-traveled. Once the processing on the film 2 2 0 has been completed, it can be detached from the leading tape 4 4 0. The leading tape 4 4 0 will keep penetrating into the system 3 01 'and will have an edge that is easy to overlap to the next film strip to be digitally developed. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification ( 210 X 297 mm) --------------------- Order --------- line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page ) 74 498692 A7 B7 printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (). Therefore, in the illustrative example of FIG. 25, the operator of the system 301 only needs to turn on the system once at the beginning of use to manually pass through the guide belt 440. In the next use, the leading band 4 4 0 will pass through automatically. In addition, since the leading tape system can be recycled by being connected to the trailing edge of the film, the same leading tape system 440 can be used to process multiple film tapes. Therefore, it is possible to avoid using a different leading tape for each film tape. FIG. 26 shows another variation of the digital film developing system 3 0 1 ′. In this embodiment, it is provided with two leading strips 4 4 0 L and 4 4 0 T, one of which passes through the system and overlaps the film 2 2 0 leading edge 4 4 at position 4 4 2 3, and the other is superimposed on the edge 44 9 of the film 220 at the position point 448. The system shown in Fig. 25 is the same as that shown in Fig. 25, which requires a manual pass of the leading band. Then, the film 2 2 0 can be overlapped to the first leading belt 4 4 0 L at the position 4 4 2, and the film can be overlapped to the second supplied by the drum 4 5 0 at the position 4 4 8 The leading band is 4 4 0 T. Once the first leading belt 4 4 0 L and the flexible sheet 2 2 0 are pulled through the driving mechanism 4 3 0, they can be collected or wound on the roll 4 5 2. The leading edge leading strip 4 4 0 T will then automatically pass through the system 3 0 1 ′ because it is caused by the film 2 2 0 overlapping at position 4 4 8. The leading edge of the leading edge tape 4 4 0 T can then be cut off and superimposed on the next roll of film 2 2 0 to be processed by the digital film developing system 3 0 1 '. Figure 28 shows another digital film developing system 3 0 3, which is superimposed with a leading tape to the film 2 2 0. In this embodiment, the digital soft ____ This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) ----- ί.  —-—-------- Order --------- line ^^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 498692 A7 B7____ 7λ V. Description of the Invention (3) The conveying system 3 0 9 b of the sheet developing system 3 0 b includes a plurality of rollers 4 6 6 on which a film and a leading belt are wound to convey through the system 3 3. In order to drive the film 2 2 0 and the previous guide belt through the system 3 0 3, the transport system 3 0 9 b includes a disk drive 4 6 4 near the outer side 4 7 6 of the system 3 0 3. The disk drive 4 6 4 includes a motor or other actuator that provides rotational motion, and includes a pair of pinch rollers 4 6 5. The pinch roller 4 6 5 can be rotated by the force of an actuator. A tensioner 4 6 2 is located near the opposite side or input side 4 7 8 of the system 3 0 9 b, wherein the tensioner includes a pair of pinch rollers 4 6 7. The film and the connected front guide belt can be moved between the rollers 4 6 7, wherein the roller system contacts or pinches the film / front guide belt and provides resistance when the film / front guide belt moves. The resistance provided by the tensioner 4 6 2 can be adjusted, such as by adjusting the contact force acting on the rollers 4 6 7. Any device for moving the rollers 4 6 7 of the tensioner 4 6 2 to form a closer contact may be suitable for this purpose. According to this feature of the present invention, it uses a single disk drive 4 6 4 to pull the film / leading belt through the system 3 0 3 and is provided by the tensioner 4 6 2 and / or other rollers 4 6 6 Resistance, while providing tensile tension on the film to avoid film jamming or distortion, and provide more accurate scanned images. The provided tension can be adjusted by adjusting the tensioner 4 6 2, and the moving speed of the film can be adjusted by adjusting the disk drive 4 6 4. The film 2 2 0 can be fed by a dispenser 4 7 0 'This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) I ----- r ----- ----------- Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy Staff Consumer Cooperatives This paper is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 498692 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (74) And the leading band 4 4 0 is fed by a dispenser 4 6 8. As mentioned above, the leading strip 4 40 can be superimposed on the leading edge and trailing edge of each of the film strips 2 2 0. A stacker 4 72 may also be used to help join the leading tape 440 and the flexible sheet 220. When the current guide belt 4 4 0 has been fed into the system and the first film frame f has reached the dispenser 3 1 0, the developer can be supplied to the film through the dispenser 3 1 0, wherein the dispenser can be formed by a slot It consists of a slit applicator (SC). When the film frame F moves along the path shown in the figure ', the film frame receiver can start development. A * first ^ imaging module 502 can scan the film image and generate a first digital image file at a first development time. As the film 2 2 0 continues to pass through the system 3 0 3, it continues to develop until it reaches a second imaging module 5 04, where a second digital image is generated at the second film development time. files. The film is continuously developed until it reaches the third imaging module 506, which generates a second image file during the development time of the second film. These three digital image files are then superimposed together to produce an image data file that includes the image features present on the screen during all three development times. Therefore, before scanning by the last module 506, the entire development time of the film is that the film is moved from position A (the scene is applied by the dispenser 3 1 0) to position B (by scanning the film And the time when the last * digital image weight ^) is generated. Fig. 29 shows another modified embodiment of the system 303 of Fig. 28. In this embodiment, a system 503 is operated in a manner similar to the system 303 of FIG. 28. However, according to the present invention ____ ----------- L ----------- order --------- line win (please read the precautions on the back first) (Fill in this page again) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 498692 A7 _B7 V. Another feature of the description of the invention, the system 5 0 3 of Figure 2 9 uses a single scanning module 5 02 Reduce equipment size and cost. Using the system of FIG. 29, scanning can be performed in multiple development times by providing a pair of combination devices / tensioners 5 6 2 on either side of the module 502. Come together. These drive / tensioners 5 6 2 can drive the film through the scanning module 5 0 2 in a forward direction 5 5 or a backward direction 5 7. Therefore, these drives / tensioners 5 62 each include a reversible or bi-directional motor or actuator. In order to perform the first scan of the screen, the film 2 2 0 can be driven in a forward direction 5 5 through the module 5 2. Once these first scans are completed, the driver / tensioner 5 6 2 can be reversed to drive the film 2 2 0 through the module 5 2 in a backward direction 5 7. During the reverse motion, the scan can be performed for the second development time, and then multiple scans can be performed for multiple development times. Alternatively, the film 2 2 0 is quickly reversed only by the driver / tensioner 5 6 2 without scanning, and then it is moved forward 5 5 5 in the second development time. Drive and scan during this time. In another way, the film 2 2 0 and the leading band 4 4 0 can be connected into a loop, and the entire loop is passed through the scanning module 5 2 during the film 2 2 multiple development times. The tension applied to the film / lead belt can be adjusted by adjusting the resistance supplied by the driver / tensioner 5 62. Furthermore, when one driver / tensioner 5 6 2 actively drives the driver / tensioner 5 6 2, the other driver / tensioner 5 6 2 can provide impedance in the driving direction, so that the The tension provided in the film / lead belt can be more accurately fed into this paper. The size of the paper is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------ r ---------- ----- Order --------- line ^^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 498692 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of Invention () Scan and film transport. Figures 27a, 27b, and 27c show a transport element according to another feature of the present invention, which includes a roller 460 that can be used in a transport system to transport a film and a front guide tape bonded thereto. This roller 460 can be used as another variation of the roller mechanism shown in Figs. 24, 25 and 26. In this embodiment of the roller 460, a pair of sprocket wheels 4 6 2 L and 4 6 2 R are connected by a cylindrical wheel shaft or a crown roller 4 6 6. The sprocket wheels 4 6 2 L and 4 6 2 R are substantially spaced apart approximately the same width as the film strip ', so that the sprocket teeth 4 6 4 can be engaged with the sprocket holes on the film strip. The sprocket teeth 4 6 4 can be appropriately spaced along the sprocket 4 6 2 L and 4 6 2 R to match the spacing of the sprocket holes located on the edges of the film strip. The sprocket wheels 4 6 2 L and 4 6 2 R are interchangeable with crown rollers 4 6 6 with wafers W of different widths, so that they can match various film widths. The roller 460 of Figs. 27a, 27b, and 27c can be fitted with a front guide belt, but does not have a sprocket hole on its edge. However, it can still guide the front guide belt on the roller. Therefore, it is possible to use a lower-cost leader tape material. For example, the foregoing guide belt 4 4 0 described in FIGS. 2, 4 5, and 2 6 may include a belt-shaped material without adhesive and without sprocket holes. Plastic, metal, or cellophane material or other suitable long strips or material strips can be used as the material of the leading strip 4 4 0. When this front guide belt 4 4 0 is fed through the system, it can straddle the outer surface 4 6 6 of the crown roller 4 6 6. Once the end film is used, the paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 × 297 mm) ------ r ---. ------------ Order --------- line ^^ · (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) The paper size of the paper is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498692 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (77) 2 2 0 When the roller 4 6 0 is reached, the tooth 4 6 4 will be able to be connected. Sprocket holes in the edges of the film. Any leading edge superimposed on the end of the film can then be placed on the crown roller 4 6 6. This design is shown in Figure 27. The flexible sheet 220 is straddled on the tooth portion 464 of the runner 462, and the leading belt 4 4 0 is straddled on the crown roller 4 6 6. The leading edge leading band 4 4 0 must be slightly narrower than the film 2 2 0 so that it can operate in the manner described above. In detail, in order to be able to straddle the crown roller 4 6 6, the width of the trailing edge leading band 4 4 0 must be smaller than the width W of the crystal circle W shown in FIG. The outer surface 4 6 8 of the crown roller 4 6 6 may be bow-shaped or cylindrical in its longitudinal direction, as shown in FIG. 2 7 c, to keep the front guide belt aligned. With this design, since the part P of the crown roller 4 6 6 having the largest diameter has a rotation speed faster than the rest of the crown roller. Thus, the conveying roller 460 of Figs. 27a, 27b, and 27c can serve as a dual-function roller, which can convey a film with a sprocket hole, and a lower cost guide material without a sprocket hole. Because the sprocket is connected to the edge of the film, it will not touch the center surface of the film, thereby reducing the risk of damage to the center surface. The foregoing description of the exemplary embodiments of the present invention has been provided for the purposes of illustration and description. The invention is not limited to any of the details described above, and modifications and changes can be made to the invention after reading the above description. Although several exemplary and modified embodiments, methods, systems, shapes, and possible applications have been described in detail above, it can be understood that many different variations can be adopted without departing from the scope of the present invention. . Moreover, although --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) ▼ Install -------- Order --------- 498692 A7 B7 78 V. Description of the invention () Although various possible designs and components have been described above, it can be understood that they can still have many other designs and components without departing from the scope of the present invention. Therefore, it should be understood that the embodiments and examples described above are used to explain the principle of the present invention and its practical application, so as to enable those who have a general understanding of the technology to use different embodiments and suitable for special purposes Different variants to implement the invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is defined by the appended patent application scope. ------- ^ ^ -------- Order --------- Line Dance (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Employees ’Cooperatives, Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs The printed paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

Claims (1)

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 1 · 一種由一顯影軟片中產生一數位影像檔之方法, 其包含: 施加顯影劑至軟片,以使該軟片開始顯影; 移動該顯影軟片通過一第一掃描模組,以在第一軟片 顯影時間中產生軟片之第一數位影像檔; 移動該顯影軟片通過一第二掃描模組,以在第一軟片 顯影時間中產生軟片之第二數位影像檔;以及 移動該軟片通過一位在第一及第二模組之間的開口。 2 ·如申請專利範圍第1項之方法,其進一步包含; 組合該第一及第二數位影像檔,以構成一可呈現在畫 面上之影像的組合影像檔。 3 ·如申請專利範圍第1項之方法,其進一步包含: 打開一位在第一及第二模組之間的活板門,以形成該 開口。 4 ·如申請專利範圍第3項之方法,其中在感應到該 軟片已到達一預定位置後,該活板門係可以自動地打開。 5 · —種數位軟片顯影運送系統,其包含: 一軟片支撐件5其係用以支撐該顯影軟片; 一驅動機構,其係用以移動該位在軟片支撐件上之顯 影軟片;以及 一活板門機構,其係鄰近該軟片支撐件,且其可以在 一關閉位置與一打開位置之間移動,其中該關閉位置係用 以使軟片在活板門機構上方移動,而該打開位置則係可使 軟片移動通過該開口。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -似- ----I J ---L I 1 --------^ · I----I--Aw 1 IT (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 6 ·如申請專利範圍第5項之系統,其中該活板門機 構係包含一樞軸,該活板門機構則係以該樞軸爲中心而轉 動。 7 ·如申請專利範圍第5項之系統,其進一步包含一 軟片槽道組件,其係位在該開口正下方,且用以將軟片容 置在一由該軟片槽道組件所形成之槽道中。 8 ·如申請專利範圍第5項之系統,其進一步包含; 一致動器,其係用以控制該活板門機構之位置; 一控制器,其係在偵測到該軟片之位置後用以控制該 致動器。 9 ·如申請專利範圍第5項之系統,其進一步包含: 一軟片導引臂,其係當該活板門機構位在打開位置時 ’可用以接觸該軟片。 1 0 · —種由一顯影軟片中產生一數位影像檔之方法 ,其包含: 施加顯影劑至軟片,以使該軟片開始顯影; 使該顯影軟片呈現拉緊之狀態; 在一第一顯影時間中供應射線至一位在拉緊軟片上之 畫面; 在第一顯影時間中偵測由畫面反射之第一射線;以及 利用所感應到之第一射線來產生一第一數位影像檔。 1 1 ·如申請專利範圍第1 0項之方法,其中該軟片 係藉由以下步驟而呈現拉緊之狀態: 以一第一速度來轉動一第一滾輪機構; 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) n n ϋ n ϋ J— f0 I if ϋ ϋ · n n n n n ϋ ϋ 一5口▼ I n n ϋ n n n ϋ I n Γ— Ji (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 叩8692 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A8 B8 C8 D8 τ、申請專利範圍 使軟片與第一滾輪機構相接觸; 以一第二速度來轉動一第二滾輪機構;以及 使軟片與第二滾輪機構相接觸; 其中該第一速度係比第二速度還快。 1 2 ·如申請專利範圍第1 〇項之方法’其進一步包 含: 使軟片形成弓形之形狀。 1 3 ·如申請專利範圍第1 〇項之方法’其中該第一 射線係包含由軟片正面反射之射線、由軟片之背面反射之 射線、以及穿透該軟片之射線。 1 4 · 一種拉緊軟片以進行掃描之機構,其包含: 一第一運送元件,其係用以接觸軟片,且其係以一第 一速度來移動; 一第二運送元件,其係與該第一運送元件隔開,其中 該第二運送元件係用以與軟片接觸,並且以一第二速度來 移動; 其中該第一及第二運送元件係用以將位在其之間之軟 片加以拉緊。 1 5 ·如申請專利範圍第1 4項之機構,其進一步包 含: 一驅動機構,其係用以使該第一及第二運送元件之至 少其中一者轉動。 1 6 ·如申請專利範圍第1 5項之機構,其進一步包 含·· 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) - ! n ϋ 1 J— Γ— ϋ f n ·ϋ n -i u n n n n n 一:口、_ W W MM KM ΜΗ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印制农 498692 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 一釋放裝置,其係用以在一力矩過度負載之後,將該 第一及第二運送元件之至少其中之一加以釋放。 1 7 ·如申請專利範圍第1 4項之機構,其進一步包 含: 一弓形軟片桿架,其係用以使該拉緊之軟片呈現弓形 之形狀。 1 8 · —種模組化數位軟片顯影系統,其包含: 一第一軟片掃描模組,其包括一第一安裝構件,該安 裝構件係固定一用以收納顯影軟片之軟片導引組件、一射 線源、以及一用以偵測由顯影軟片反射之射線的感應器; 以及 一*弟一軟片掃描模組,其包括一^第二安裝構件,該安 裝構件係固定一用以收納由第一模組送出之顯影軟片之軟 片導引組件、一射線源、以及一用以偵測由顯影軟片反射 之射線的感應器; 其中該第一及第二安裝構件係可分離構件。 1 9 ·如申請專利範圍第1 8項之模組化數位軟片顯 影系統,其中該第一及第二模組係大致相同的。 2 0 ·如申請專利範圍第1 8項之模組化數位軟片顯 影系統,其進一步包含: 一連接至第一及第二安裝構件之骨架。 2 1 · —種由一顯影軟片產生一數位影像檔之方法, 其包含: 將一前導帶連接至軟片之前緣; 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -----ί--ί*-----------訂---------Aw--- ] (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498692 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 將前導帶及所連接之軟片穿過第一及第二掃描模組, 其中該掃描模組係可分離式模組; 將膠帶連接至軟片,使得該膠帶係由一軟片側緣延伸 而出; 施加顯影劑至軟片,以使軟片開始顯影; 以皮帶接觸該膠帶,並且移動該皮帶以使該膠帶及所 連結之軟片通過第一掃描模組; 利用第一掃描模組來掃描該軟 影時間中產生一第一數位影像檔, 係呈拉緊之狀態; 移動該軟片通過一介於第一及 以及 片,而在一第一軟片顯 其中該軟片在掃描期間 第二模組之間的開口; (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 掃描模組來掃描軟片,以在第二軟片顯影時 。_... 参' 統’:#:/,替:用以運送軟片纖· 間中產生 . 2 2Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 498692 A8 B8 C8 D8 VI. Application for Patent Scope 1 · A method for generating a digital image file from a developing film, comprising: applying a developer to the film to start the film Developing; moving the developing film through a first scanning module to generate a first digital image file of the film during the first film developing time; moving the developing film through a second scanning module to develop the first film during the first film developing time Generating a second digital image file of the film; and moving the film through an opening between the first and second modules. 2. The method according to item 1 of the patent application scope, further comprising: combining the first and second digital image files to form a combined image file that can present an image on the screen. 3. The method of claim 1, further comprising: opening a trap door between the first and second modules to form the opening. 4. The method according to item 3 of the patent application range, wherein the trap door can be automatically opened after sensing that the film has reached a predetermined position. 5 · A digital film developing conveying system, comprising: a film supporting member 5 for supporting the developing film; a driving mechanism for moving the developing film on the film supporting member; and The door mechanism is adjacent to the film support and can be moved between a closed position and an open position, wherein the closed position is used to move the film above the trap door mechanism, and the open position is The film can be moved through the opening. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -like- ---- IJ --- LI 1 -------- ^ · I ---- I-- Aw 1 IT (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 498692 A8 B8 C8 D8 VI. Application for Patent Scope 6 · If the system for item 5 of the patent scope is applied, The trapdoor mechanism includes a pivot, and the trapdoor mechanism rotates around the pivot. 7 · The system according to item 5 of the patent application scope, further comprising a film channel assembly, which is located directly below the opening, and is used for accommodating a film in a channel formed by the film channel assembly . 8 · The system according to item 5 of the patent application, further comprising: an actuator for controlling the position of the trapdoor mechanism; a controller for detecting the position of the film; Control the actuator. 9 · The system according to item 5 of the patent application, further comprising: a film guide arm, which can be used to contact the film when the trapdoor mechanism is in the open position. 1 0 · A method for generating a digital image file from a developing film, comprising: applying a developer to the film so that the film starts developing; making the developing film appear in a tensioned state; at a first developing time Supplying a ray to a frame on the tensioned film; detecting a first ray reflected by the frame in a first development time; and using the sensed first ray to generate a first digital image file. 1 1 · The method according to item 10 of the scope of patent application, wherein the film is in a tensioned state by the following steps: a first roller mechanism is rotated at a first speed; this paper size applies Chinese national standards ( CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) nn ϋ n ϋ J— f0 I if ϋ ϋ · nnnnn ϋ ϋ One 5 mouth ▼ I nn ϋ nnn ϋ I n Γ— Ji (Please read the notes on the back before filling in (This page) 叩 8692 A8 B8 C8 D8 τ printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the patent application scope makes the film contact the first roller mechanism; rotates a second roller mechanism at a second speed; and makes the film In contact with the second roller mechanism; wherein the first speed is faster than the second speed. 1 2 · The method according to item 10 of the scope of patent application ', further comprising: forming the film into an arcuate shape. 1 3. The method according to item 10 of the scope of patent application, wherein the first ray includes rays reflected from the front of the film, rays reflected from the back of the film, and rays penetrating the film. 1 4 · A mechanism for tightening a film for scanning, comprising: a first conveying element for contacting the film and moving at a first speed; a second conveying element for contacting the film The first conveying element is separated, wherein the second conveying element is used to contact the film, and is moved at a second speed; wherein the first and second conveying elements are used to apply the film positioned therebetween. tension. 15 · The mechanism for applying for a patent item No. 14 further includes: a driving mechanism for rotating at least one of the first and second transport elements. 1 6 · If the institution applying for item No. 15 of the patent scope, it further contains ... This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)-! N ϋ 1 J— Γ— ϋ fn · ϋ n -iunnnnn I: Mouth, _ WW MM KM ΜΗ (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Printed Agriculture 498692 A8 B8 C8 D8 6. Application for Patent Scope 1 Release , Which is used to release at least one of the first and second transport elements after an excessive torque load. 17 · The mechanism for applying for item No. 14 in the scope of patent application, further comprising: a bow-shaped film holder, which is used to make the tensioned film take an arcuate shape. 1 8 · A modular digital film developing system comprising: a first film scanning module including a first mounting member, the mounting member is fixed with a film guide assembly for receiving a developing film, a A radiation source, and a sensor for detecting radiation reflected by the developing film; and a film scanning module including a second mounting member, the mounting member is fixed to receive a first The film guide assembly of the developing film sent by the module, a ray source, and a sensor for detecting rays reflected by the developing film; wherein the first and second mounting members are detachable members. 19 · If the modular digital film development system of item 18 of the scope of patent application, the first and second modules are substantially the same. 2 0. The modular digital film development system according to item 18 of the patent application scope, further comprising: a skeleton connected to the first and second mounting members. 2 1 · —A method for generating a digital image file from a developing film, comprising: connecting a leading tape to the leading edge of the film; this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)- ---- ί--ί * ----------- Order --------- Aw ---] (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 498692 A8 B8 C8 D8 6. The scope of the patent application Pass the leading tape and the connected film through the first and second scanning modules, where the scanning module is a detachable module; connect the tape to the film so that the tape is made of A side edge of a film extends out; apply a developer to the film to start the development of the film; contact the tape with a belt, and move the belt so that the tape and the connected film pass through the first scanning module; use the first scan The module generates a first digital image file during the scanning of the soft shadow time, which is in a tensioned state; moving the soft film through an intervening first and second film, and displaying the first soft film in which the soft film is first The opening between the two modules; (Please read the note on the back first Please fill in this page again) Scan module to scan the film, when the second film is developed. _... See '系 ’: #: /, instead: used to transport soft fibers. Occasionally. 2 2 數位影像檔 蠢統:,募:曾含: >庳理系 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 處理裝置,該處理裝置係具有一用以處理該 軟片之處理空間; (b )第一對皮帶,其彼此係隔開一預 沿著一處理路徑而延伸通過該處理裝置之處 一對皮帶係隔開且用以接觸 緣部分,而不會碰觸到該軟片帶其 緣部分之間的中央部分; (c )第二對皮帶,其 軟片帶之第 位在第 定距離,並且 理空間,該第 表面的相對側 表面之相對側 彼此係隔開一預定距離,並且 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ' 86 - 498692 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 沿著一處理路徑而延伸通過該處理裝置之處理空間,該第 二對皮帶係隔開且用以接觸一軟片帶之第二表面的相對側 緣部分,而不會碰觸到該軟片帶其位在第二表面之相對側 緣部分之間的中央部分;以及 (d ) —驅動組件,其係用以移動該第一及第二組皮 帶一體式地通過該處理空間,該第一及第二對皮帶係配置 成在第一對皮帶中之其中一皮帶係與在第二對皮帶中對應 之皮帶相互配合,以捕捉住該軟片之一側緣部分,且在第 一對皮帶中之另一皮帶係與在第二對皮帶中對應之皮帶相 互配合,以捕捉住該軟片之另一側緣部分,該第一組及第 二組皮帶係共同將夾置於其間之軟片帶沿著該處理路徑來 運送,而不會接觸到軟片之中央部分。 2 3 ·如申請專利範圍第2 2項之軟片處理系統,其 中該處理裝置係包括一射線源以及一感應器,該感應器係 用以偵測由軟片反射之射線,該感應器係藉由該軟片反射 之射線或穿透該軟片之射線而與射線源相聯繫。 2 4 · —種用以將一具有第一及第二表面之軟片帶運 送通過一掃描組件之設備,其包含: 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 一光源,其係當一軟片帶通過該掃描組件時,可以使 光線穿透該軟片帶; 一控制表面,其係當軟片帶移動通過該掃描組件時, 其可活動式地控制該軟片帶之位置及方向;以及 一皮帶組件’其係包括至少一可動皮帶,其係可活動 式地銜接一軟片之第一表面,並且將軟片帶向前推抵該控 -»/ - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 498692 ABCD 六、申請專利範圍 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 制表面,該皮帶組件及控制表面係共同配合而捕捉一夾置 之軟片帶’且將該夾置之軟片帶以相對於掃描組件之預定 方向及位置來加以移動。 2 5 ·如申請專利範圍第2 4項之設備,其中該控制 表面係可移動的,且其係與該皮帶以定時的關係而移動。 2 6 ·如申請專利範圍第2 4項之設備,其中該皮帶 組件係包括一第一組皮帶,其係與軟片帶之第一表面相接 觸,以及包括一第二組皮帶,其係與軟片帶之第二表面相 接觸。 2 7 · —種將一軟片帶之一部分運送至一映像站之方 法,其包含以下之步驟: (a )將軟片帶之一部分向前推抵一弓形控制表面; (b )轉動該控制表面,以將該軟片帶之部分移動至 掃描位置; (c )將該軟片帶其位在該掃描位置上之部分以一射 線源來加以照射;以及 (d )感應該位在掃描位置上之軟片帶所反射之射線 〇 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 2 8 ·如申請專利範圍第2 7項之方法,其中該映像 站係包括至少一皮帶,其係以相對於轉動之控制表面之定 時關係而移動,其中該至少一皮帶係用以將軟片帶之一部 分向前推抵於該弓形控制表面。 2 9 · —種運送軟片通過一掃描系統之方法,該方法 係包含以下之步驟: 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A8 B8 C8 D8 夂、申請專利範圍 將一膠帶連接至一軟片帶,使得膠帶之一部分係由軟 片帶之一側緣延伸而出; 銜接該膠帶由軟片帶之側緣延伸出之部分,以移動該 膠帶及所連結之軟片帶;以及 掃描該連結在膠帶上之軟片帶,以產生一第一數位影 像檔。 3 0 ·如申請專利範圍第2 9項之方法,其中該膠帶 係銜接在該軟片帶之至少一側緣附近。 3 1 ·如申請專利範圍第2 9項之方法,其中該膠帶 係由一滾輪機構所銜接。 3 2 ·如申請專利範圍第2 9項之方法,其中該膠帶 係具有大於3 5毫米之寬度。 3 3 ·如申請專利範圍第2 9項之方法,其中該銜接 步驟係包含: 將一第一膠帶連結至該軟片帶之第一側緣,使得該第 一膠帶係由該第一側緣向外延伸而出;以及 將一第二膠帶連結至軟片帶之第二側緣,使得該第二 膠帶係由第二側緣向外延伸而出。 3 4 ·如申請專利範圍第2 9項之方法,其中該數位 影像檔係當軟片顯影時產生。 3 5 ·如申請專利範圍第2 9項之方法,其進一步包 含·· 掃描該軟片帶,以產生一第二數位影像檔;以及 將第一及第二數位影像檔加以組合,以產生一可呈現 -----i.—l·.—--------訂·--------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -«V - 498692 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 在軟片帶上影像的組合影像。 3 6 · —種數位軟片顯影系統,其包含: 一膠帶; 一軟片帶,其係連結至該膠帶; 一運送機構,其係用以接觸該膠帶,並且移動該膠帶 及所連結之軟片帶; 一射線源,其係用以供應射線至軟片帶;以及 一感應器,其係用以偵測由該軟片帶所反射之射線, 以產生一位在軟片帶上之影像的數位影像檔。 3 7 ·如申請專利範圍第3 6項之系統,其中該軟片 帶係比膠帶還要窄。 3 8 ·如申請專利範圍第3 6項之系統,其中該膠帶 大致上係無法透過射線而看到。 3 9 ·如申請專利範圍第3 6項之系統,其中所偵測 到之射線係包含由軟片帶之正面反射之射線、由軟片帶之 背面所反射之射線、以及穿透該軟片帶之射線。 4 0 · —種由軟片產生影像之方法,該方法包含以下 之步驟: 將一前導帶之末緣連接至一軟片帶之前緣; 將前導帶穿過一軟片運送系統; 利用軟片運送系統來運送該前導帶及所連結之軟片; 施加顯影劑至軟片,以使該軟片開始顯影; 供應射線至該顯影軟片;以及 偵測由顯影軟片所反射之射線。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂---------線- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -VO - 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 498692 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 4 1 ·如申請專利範圍第4 0項之方法,其進一步包 含: 將該前導帶之前緣連結至該軟片帶之末緣,以構成一 連續環圈。 4 2 ·如申請專利範圍第4 1項之方法,其進一步包 含: 將一第二前導帶之前緣連結至軟片帶之末緣。 4 3 · —種數位顯影系統,其包含: 一疊接器,其係用以將一前導帶連結至軟片帶; 一軟片運送系統,其係用以移動前導帶及所連結之軟 片; 一顯影劑施配器,其係用以供應顯影劑至軟片帶; 一射線源,其係用以供應射線至顯影軟片;以及 一感應器,其係用以感應由顯影軟片反射之射線,並 由所感應之射線來產生一數位影像檔。 4 4 .如申請專利範圍第4 3項之數位軟片顯影系統 ,其進一步包含: 一第二射線源,其係用以在第二軟片顯影時間供應射 線至顯影軟片; 一第二感應器,其係用以在第二軟片顯影時間中感應 由顯影軟片所反射之射線,並且由所感應之射線來產生一 第二數位影像檔;以及 一影像處理器,其係用以將第一及第二數位影像檔組 合成一最終的數位影像檔。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -9Γ- -----Γ.--l·.-----------訂---------線^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印制取 498692 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 45·—種軟片運送系統,其包含: 一軟片帶,其在靠近相對邊緣處係具有鏈輪孔; 一前導帶,其係比軟片帶還窄,並且連結至軟片帶之 前緣端; 一對相對配置之鏈輪,其係具有齒部,以與位在軟片 帶上之鏈輪孔相銜接;以及 一滾輪,其係連接該鏈輪,並且支撐該前導帶。 4 6 ·如申請專利範圍第4 5項之運送機構,其中該 滾輪係具有一弓形表面。 4 7 ·如申請專利範圍第4 5項之運送機構,其中該 滾輪係用以自動地對正該前導帶。 4 8 · —種數位軟片顯影系統,其包含: 一顯影劑施配器,其係用以供應顯影劑至軟片; 一光源,其係用以供應射線至顯影軟片; 一感應器,其係用以感應由顯影軟片所反射之射線; 以及 一單一驅動機構,其係用以移動該顯影軟片通過光源 及感應器。 4 9 ·如申請專利範圍第4 8項之系統,其中該單一 驅動機構係包含: 一馬達;以及 一滾輪,其係藉由馬達之運動而轉動。 5 0 ·如申請專利範圍第4 9項之系統,其中該單一 驅動機構係用以拉動該軟片通過光源及感應器。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -----ί--Γ*-----------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 498692 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 5 1 ·如申請專利範圍第4 8項之系統,其中該驅動 機構係包含一絞盤驅動器。 5 2 ·如申請專利範圍第4 8項之系統,其進一步包 含: 一阻抗機構,其係與驅動機構隔開,且用以接觸該軟 片,並且提供顯影射線移動時之阻力,使得該軟片在驅動 機構與阻抗機構之間係呈現拉緊之狀態。 -------Γ.— Γ — --------訂---------線 Φ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 -- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)Digital image file stupid :, raise: once included: > Department of Economics, Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs, employee consumer cooperative print processing device, the processing device has a processing space for processing the film; (b) the first pair The belts are spaced from each other, a pair of belts are spaced apart and extend along the processing device in advance along a processing path, and are used to contact the edge portions without touching the edge portions of the film belt. The central part; (c) the second pair of belts, the first position of the film strip is at a predetermined distance, and the physical space, the opposite sides of the second surface are spaced a predetermined distance from each other, and the paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 X 297 mm) '86-498692 A8 B8 C8 D8 VI. Patent Application Scope (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Extending through the processing along a processing path The processing space of the device. The second pair of belts are separated and used to contact the opposite side edge portion of the second surface of a film strip without touching the opposite side of the film strip on the second surface. A central portion between the side edge portions; and (d) a drive assembly for moving the first and second sets of belts through the processing space integrally, the first and second pairs of belts being configured at One of the belts in the first pair of belts cooperates with the corresponding belt in the second pair of belts to capture a side edge portion of the film, and the other belt in the first pair of belts is in contact with the second belt. The corresponding belts in the belts cooperate with each other to capture the other edge portion of the film. The first and second sets of belts jointly transport the film belts sandwiched between them along the processing path without It will touch the center of the film. 2 3 · The film processing system according to item 22 of the patent application scope, wherein the processing device includes a ray source and a sensor, the sensor is used to detect the rays reflected by the film, and the sensor is provided by The radiation reflected by the film or the radiation transmitted through the film is associated with the radiation source. 2 4 · —A device for transporting a film strip with first and second surfaces through a scanning module, including: a light source printed by a consumer cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, which is passed as a film strip The scanning unit can allow light to penetrate the film strip; a control surface, which can movably control the position and direction of the film strip when the film strip moves through the scanning element; and a belt assembly 'its The system includes at least one movable belt, which is movably connected to the first surface of a film, and pushes the film belt forward against the control-»/-This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 498692 ABCD VI. Patent application scope (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) to make the surface, the belt assembly and the control surface work together to capture a sandwiched film strip 'and place the clip The film strip is moved in a predetermined direction and position relative to the scanning unit. 2 5 · The device according to item 24 of the scope of patent application, wherein the control surface is movable, and it is moved in a timing relationship with the belt. 26. The device as claimed in claim 24, wherein the belt assembly includes a first group of belts that are in contact with the first surface of the film strip, and includes a second group of belts that are in contact with the film The second surface of the belt is in contact. 2 7 · A method of transporting a portion of a film strip to a imaging station, comprising the following steps: (a) pushing a portion of the film strip forward against an arcuate control surface; (b) rotating the control surface, To move the portion of the film strip to the scanning position; (c) to irradiate the portion of the film strip at the scanning position with a ray source; and (d) to sense the film strip at the scanning position The reflected rays are printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economics. 2 8 · If the method of the scope of patent application No. 27, the imaging station includes at least one belt, which is relative to the timing of the rotating control surface Moving in relation, wherein the at least one belt is used to push a portion of the film strip forward against the arcuate control surface. 2 9 · —A method for transporting films through a scanning system, the method includes the following steps: This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Manufacturing 498692 A8 B8 C8 D8 夂, the scope of the patent application is to connect a tape to a flexible tape, so that a part of the tape is extended from one side edge of the flexible tape; connecting the part of the tape extended from the side edge of the flexible tape, To move the tape and the connected film tape; and scan the film tape connected to the tape to generate a first digital image file. 30. The method according to item 29 of the patent application scope, wherein the adhesive tape is connected near at least one side edge of the film tape. 3 1 · The method according to item 29 of the patent application scope, wherein the tape is connected by a roller mechanism. 32. The method of claim 29, wherein the tape has a width of more than 35 mm. 3 3 · The method according to item 29 of the patent application scope, wherein the connecting step includes: attaching a first tape to a first side edge of the flexible tape, so that the first tape is directed from the first side edge Extending outwardly; and connecting a second tape to the second side edge of the flexible tape, so that the second tape extends outward from the second side edge. 3 4 · The method according to item 29 of the patent application range, wherein the digital image file is generated when the film is developed. 35. The method of claim 29, further comprising: scanning the film strip to generate a second digital image file; and combining the first and second digital image files to produce a Show ----- i.—l · .—-------- Order · -------- Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 X 297 mm)-«V-498692 A8 B8 C8 D8 6. Application for Patent Scope A combined image of images on a film strip. 3 6 · — A digital film developing system including: a tape; a film tape connected to the tape; a transport mechanism for contacting the tape and moving the tape and the connected film tape; A ray source is used to supply rays to the film strip; and a sensor is used to detect the rays reflected by the film strip to generate a digital image file of an image on the film strip. 37. The system according to item 36 of the patent application, wherein the film tape is narrower than the adhesive tape. 38. The system according to item 36 of the patent application scope, wherein the tape is substantially invisible through radiation. 39. The system according to item 36 of the patent application scope, wherein the detected rays include rays reflected from the front side of the film strip, rays reflected from the back side of the film strip, and rays penetrating the film strip. . 4 0 · —A method for generating an image from a film, the method includes the following steps: connecting the leading edge of a leading tape to the leading edge of a film tape; passing the leading tape through a film conveying system; using the film conveying system to transport The leading tape and the attached film; applying a developer to the film to start the film development; supplying rays to the developing film; and detecting the rays reflected by the developing film. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order --------- Line-Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives This paper is printed in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -VO-Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 498692 A8 B8 C8 D8 VI. Application for Patent Scope 4 1 · If the method for applying for Patent Scope No. 40, further includes: before the leading band The edge is connected to the trailing edge of the film strip to form a continuous loop. 4 2 · The method according to item 41 of the patent application scope, further comprising: connecting a leading edge of a second leading tape to a trailing edge of the film tape. 4 3 · — A digital developing system including: a stacker for connecting a leading tape to a film tape; a film conveying system for moving the leading tape and the connected film; a developing device An agent dispenser for supplying a developer to the film strip; a ray source for supplying rays to the developing film; and a sensor for sensing rays reflected by the developing film and being sensed by the Ray to generate a digital image file. 4 4. The digital film developing system according to item 43 of the patent application scope, further comprising: a second radiation source for supplying radiation to the developing film during the development time of the second film; a second sensor, which It is used to sense the rays reflected by the developing film during the development time of the second film, and a second digital image file is generated by the sensed rays; and an image processor is used to convert the first and second images. The digital image files are combined into a final digital image file. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -9Γ- ----- Γ .-- l · .----------- Order ---- ----- Line ^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 498692 A8 B8 C8 D8 VI. Application for patent scope 45 · —A kind of film delivery system, which Contains: a film belt, which has sprocket holes near the opposite edge; a front guide belt, which is narrower than the film belt, and is connected to the leading edge of the film belt; a pair of oppositely arranged sprocket wheels, which have The teeth are engaged with the sprocket holes on the film belt; and a roller is connected to the sprocket and supports the front guide belt. 46. The transport mechanism according to item 45 of the patent application scope, wherein the roller system has an arcuate surface. 47. The transport mechanism according to item 45 of the patent application scope, wherein the roller is used to automatically align the front guide belt. 4 8 · — A digital film developing system comprising: a developer dispenser for supplying a developer to the film; a light source for supplying radiation to the developing film; and a sensor for Sensing the radiation reflected by the developing film; and a single driving mechanism for moving the developing film through the light source and the sensor. 49. The system according to item 48 of the patent application scope, wherein the single driving mechanism includes: a motor; and a roller which is rotated by the movement of the motor. 50. The system according to item 49 of the patent application scope, wherein the single driving mechanism is used to pull the film through the light source and the sensor. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----- ί--Γ * ----------- Order --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 498692 A8 B8 C8 D8 VI. Patent Application 5 1 · If the system of the patent application No. 48, the drive mechanism includes a winch drive. 5 2 · The system according to item 48 of the scope of patent application, further comprising: an impedance mechanism, which is separated from the driving mechanism, is used to contact the film, and provides resistance when the developing ray moves so that the film is in The driving mechanism and the impedance mechanism are in a state of tension. ------- Γ.— Γ — -------- Order --------- line Φ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by Employee Consumer Cooperatives-This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)
TW89128232A 1999-12-30 2000-12-29 Methods and apparatus for transporting and positioning film in a digital film processing system TW498692B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US17404199P 1999-12-30 1999-12-30
US17365399P 1999-12-30 1999-12-30
US17404099P 1999-12-30 1999-12-30
US17408499P 1999-12-30 1999-12-30
US17404299P 1999-12-30 1999-12-30

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW498692B true TW498692B (en) 2002-08-11

Family

ID=27538896

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW89128232A TW498692B (en) 1999-12-30 2000-12-29 Methods and apparatus for transporting and positioning film in a digital film processing system

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (1) TW498692B (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108769454A (en) * 2018-07-23 2018-11-06 沈阳派得林科技有限责任公司 It is a kind of intelligently to adjust weld seam negative plate digitization scanning device and its scanning drive method

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108769454A (en) * 2018-07-23 2018-11-06 沈阳派得林科技有限责任公司 It is a kind of intelligently to adjust weld seam negative plate digitization scanning device and its scanning drive method

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20020051215A1 (en) Methods and apparatus for transporting and positioning film in a digital film processing system
WO2012090609A1 (en) Label attaching device
US4266251A (en) Facsimile transmission and reception apparatus
US20030126962A1 (en) Digital photofinishing mehtod and apparatus
JPS5995170A (en) Thermal transfer recording apparatus
TW498692B (en) Methods and apparatus for transporting and positioning film in a digital film processing system
JP5898299B2 (en) Labeling device
US7371025B2 (en) Printer
US6664993B2 (en) Image transfer apparatus and image transfer method
US7260321B2 (en) Image recording apparatus
JPH01502573A (en) Small printer with cassette drawer sheet feeder
US6481710B2 (en) Apparatus for transporting individual sheets through a device for exposing or printing the sheets
JPH0733278A (en) Document conveying device and overhead projector
JPH0336155A (en) Ticket storing device
JP3804936B2 (en) Sheet transport device
JP5898298B2 (en) Labeling device
JP2913431B2 (en) Document feeder for image forming apparatus
JP4123454B2 (en) Film transport unit
JP2572780Y2 (en) Document feeder
JP4597412B2 (en) Film carrier
JPH11236163A (en) Sheet bundle binding apparatus
JPH01502503A (en) A small printer with an integrated feeder for separation paper
JP3201211B2 (en) Conveyor for photo printing equipment
JPS6271674A (en) Recorder
JP3726218B2 (en) Sub-scan transport mechanism

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
GD4A Issue of patent certificate for granted invention patent
MM4A Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees